283
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 1/283 Chapter 1 Overview 1-1 ......................................................................................... 1.1 Data Configuration Principle 1-1 ................................................................... 1.2 Authority 1-3 ................................................................................................. 1.3 Operation Step 1-4 ....................................................................................... 1.4 Start the BSC Data Auto Configuration System 1-4 ..................................... 1.5 Initial Data Configuration 1-9 ........................................................................ 1.5.1 Start initial data configuration 1-9 ......................................................... 1.5.2 Introduction to the Main Interfaces 1-10 ................................................. 1.5.3 Data Backup and Reloading 1-13 .......................................................... 1.5.4 Modification of System Parameters 1-17 ............................................... 1.5.5 Data Transfer and Conversion 1-19 ....................................................... 1.5.6 Export Network Parameter 1-20 ............................................................. 1.5.7 Import Network Parameter 1-20 ............................................................. 1.5.8 Report Cell Information to Server 1-21 .................................................. 1.5.9 Operation Introduction 1-21 ................................................................... 1.6 Dynamic Data Configuration 1-24 .................................................................. 1.6.1 Start Dynamic Data Configuration 1-25 ................................................. 1.6.2 Main Interface Introduction 1-25 ............................................................ 1.6.3 Data Backup 1-27 .................................................................................. 1.6.4 Report Cell Information to Server 1-27 .................................................. 1.6.5 Refresh Selected Tables 1-28 ................................................................ 1.6.6 Dynamic Configuration Procedure 1-28 ................................................. 1.7 Data Browsing 1-29 ........................................................................................ 1.8 Troubleshooting 1-31 ...................................................................................... 1.8.1 Troubleshooting with Starting 1-31 ........................................................ 1.8.2 Troubleshooting about Dynamic Configuration 1-35 .............................. Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data 2-1 ....................................................................... 2.1 Modify BIE Visibility 2-1 ................................................................................ 2.2 Modify LAPD Board’s Visibility 2-4 ............................................................... 2.3 Modify BSC Interface Phase ID 2-6 .............................................................. 2.4 Modify Voice Optimization Parameter 2-8 .................................................... 2.5 Modify BSC BIE CRC4 Check 2-9 ................................................................ 2.6 Configure Monitor Timeslot 2-11 .................................................................... 2.7 Modify Abis Bypass Switch 2-16 .................................................................... 2.8 Dynamic Configuration without Commands 2-18 ........................................... 2.8.1 Trunk Circuits 2-19 ................................................................................. 2.8.2 BTS Software Index 2-22 ....................................................................... 2.8.3 Flow Control 2-25 ................................................................................... 2.8.4 Common Parameter 2-26 .......................................................................

Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 1/283

Chapter 1 Overview 1-1.........................................................................................

1.1 Data Configuration Principle 1-1...................................................................

1.2 Authority 1-3.................................................................................................

1.3 Operation Step 1-4.......................................................................................1.4 Start the BSC Data Auto Configuration System 1-4.....................................

1.5 Initial Data Configuration 1-9........................................................................

1.5.1 Start initial data configuration 1-9.........................................................

1.5.2 Introduction to the Main Interfaces 1-10.................................................

1.5.3 Data Backup and Reloading 1-13..........................................................

1.5.4 Modification of System Parameters 1-17...............................................

1.5.5 Data Transfer and Conversion 1-19.......................................................

1.5.6 Export Network Parameter 1-20.............................................................

1.5.7 Import Network Parameter 1-20.............................................................1.5.8 Report Cell Information to Server 1-21..................................................

1.5.9 Operation Introduction 1-21...................................................................

1.6 Dynamic Data Configuration 1-24..................................................................

1.6.1 Start Dynamic Data Configuration 1-25.................................................

1.6.2 Main Interface Introduction 1-25............................................................

1.6.3 Data Backup 1-27..................................................................................

1.6.4 Report Cell Information to Server 1-27..................................................

1.6.5 Refresh Selected Tables 1-28................................................................

1.6.6 Dynamic Configuration Procedure 1-28.................................................

1.7 Data Browsing 1-29........................................................................................

1.8 Troubleshooting 1-31......................................................................................

1.8.1 Troubleshooting with Starting 1-31........................................................

1.8.2 Troubleshooting about Dynamic Configuration 1-35..............................

Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data 2-1.......................................................................

2.1 Modify BIE Visibility 2-1................................................................................

2.2 Modify LAPD Board’s Visibility 2-4...............................................................

2.3 Modify BSC Interface Phase ID 2-6..............................................................

2.4 Modify Voice Optimization Parameter 2-8....................................................

2.5 Modify BSC BIE CRC4 Check 2-9................................................................

2.6 Configure Monitor Timeslot 2-11....................................................................

2.7 Modify Abis Bypass Switch 2-16....................................................................

2.8 Dynamic Configuration without Commands 2-18...........................................

2.8.1 Trunk Circuits 2-19.................................................................................

2.8.2 BTS Software Index 2-22.......................................................................

2.8.3 Flow Control 2-25...................................................................................

2.8.4 Common Parameter 2-26.......................................................................

Page 2: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 2/283

2.8.5 Semi-Permanent Connection 2-28.........................................................

2.8.6 Alarm Parameter 2-30............................................................................

2.8.7 GMEM Configuration 2-32.....................................................................

2.8.8 Board Software Loading 2-35................................................................

2.8.9 Timer Data 2-36.....................................................................................

2.8.10 TMU Auto Activation Info 2-38.............................................................

2.9 Import Network Parameters 2-42...................................................................

2.10 Export Network Parameters 2-43.................................................................

2.11 Modify Reserved Parameters 2-45...............................................................

Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data 3-1.......................................................................

3.1 Add a Site 3-1...............................................................................................

3.2 Delete a Site 3-15...........................................................................................

3.3 Add TRX 3-20.................................................................................................3.4 Delete TRX 3-26.............................................................................................

3.5 Add or Delete Board 3-29...............................................................................

3.6 Modify Board Type 3-32.................................................................................

3.7 Modify Site Data 3-36.....................................................................................

3.8 Modify Site’s Output Property 3-39.................................................................

3.9 Startup Traffic Stat. Task Re-register 3-40.....................................................

3.10 Rename Site or Cell 3-42.............................................................................

3.11 Modify Ring Topology Mark 3-44..................................................................

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data 4-1........................................................................

4.1 Add Cell 4-1..................................................................................................

4.2 Delete Cell 4-7..............................................................................................

4.3 Modify BCC and NCC 4-10............................................................................

4.4 Modify Cell’s Property 4-13............................................................................

4.5 Modify Cell’s Call Control Parameter 4-16.....................................................

4.6 Modify Cell’s Alarm Limit 4-18........................................................................

4.7 Modify Cell’s FH Property 4-20.......................................................................

4.8 Modify Cell’s Handover Parameter 4-25.........................................................

4.9 Modify Cell’s Power Control Parameter 4-30.................................................

4.10 Modify Cell’s Channel Management Parameter 4-32...................................

4.11 Modify Cell’s CGI 4-35..................................................................................

4.12 Modify Cell’s System Information 4-37.........................................................

4.13 Modify Cell’s Broadcast DRX Property 4-41.................................................

4.14 Modify Cell’s Install Status 4-43...................................................................

4.15 Modify Cell’s Allocation Table (BA1 & BA2 Table) 4-45...............................

4.16 Modify Double Timeslots Related Property 4-48..........................................

4.17 Modify TRX’s Property 4-51.........................................................................

Page 3: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 3/283

4.18 Modify DC Bias Voltage and RACH Min Access Level 4-54........................

4.19 Modify TRX’s Channel Type 4-56.................................................................

4.20 Modify TRX’s Frequency 4-60......................................................................

4.21 Modify GPRS Function 4-63.........................................................................

4.22 Modify TRX Priority 4-65..............................................................................

4.23 External Cell 4-67.........................................................................................

4.23.1 Add External Cell 4-67.........................................................................

4.23.2 Delete External Cell 4-70.....................................................................

4.23.3 Modify External Cell 4-71.....................................................................

4.24 Batch Modify Cell’s Network Parameter 4-74...............................................

4.25 Configure RSL Flow Control Parameter 4-77...............................................

Appendix A Abbreviations A-1..............................................................................

Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge B-1...........................................................

B.1 BSC Data B-1...............................................................................................

B.1.1 Configuration Principles and Flow B-1.................................................

B.1.2 Numbering Principle B-2......................................................................

B.1.3 AM/ CM Data Configuration B-5...........................................................

B.1.4 BM Data Configuration B-7..................................................................

B.2 Clock Data Configuration B-11.......................................................................

B.3 Trunk and Signaling on the A- interface B-12.................................................

B.4 BTS Networking B-14.....................................................................................B.4.1 Principle of Numbering B-14..................................................................

B.4.2 Introduction to BIE B-16.........................................................................

B.4.3 Star Networking B-18.............................................................................

B.4.4 Chain Networking B-22..........................................................................

B.4.5 Tree Networking B-39............................................................................

B.4.6 Half Rate Networking B-40.....................................................................

B.4.7 Ring Networking B-43............................................................................

Appendix C Correspondence Relation between Data Table and DBFFiles C-1...................................................................................................................

Page 4: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 4/283

 

HUAWEI

M900/M1800 Base Station Controller 

Data Configuration Manual Dynamic Configuration

V300R002

Page 5: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 5/283

M900/M1800 Base Station Controller 

Data Configuration Manual 

Volume Dynamic Configuration

Manual Version T2-031674-20031110-C-6.01

Product Version V300R002

BOM 31160974

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support

and service. Please feel free to contact our local office, customer care center or company

headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 

 Address: Administration Building, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.,

Bantian, Longgang District, Shenzhen, P. R. China

Postal Code: 518129

Website: http://www.huawei.com 

Email: [email protected]

Page 6: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 6/283

 

 © 2003 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

All Rights Reserved

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any

means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks

®, HUAWEI

®, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET, ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC, SBS,

TELLIN, InfoLink, Netkey, Quidway, SYNLOCK, Radium, , M900/M1800,

TELESIGHT, Quidview, NETENGINE, Musa, OptiX, Airbridge, Tellwin, Inmedia,

VRP, DOPRA, iTELLIN, C&C08 iNET, iBill and infox are trademarks of Huawei

Technologies Co., Ltd.

Notice

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort

has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the

contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document

don't constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Page 7: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 7/283

About This Manual

Version

The product version that corresponds to the manual is M900/M1800 Base Station

Controller V300R002.

Organization of the Manual

The product version corresponds to the manual is M900/M1800 BSC V300R002.

Chapter 1 is a brief introduction of the BSC Data Auto Configuration System. Including

the principle of data configuration, the relationship between different data format, and

common troubleshooting. The chapter is same as the Chapter 1 in M900/M1800 Base

Station Controller Data Configuration Manual – Initial Configuration.

Chapter 2 introduces in detail the dynamic configuration of BSC.

Chapter 3 introduces in detail the dynamic configuration of BTS.

Chapter 4 introduces in detail the dynamic configuration of Cell.

 Appendix is about the abbreviation and fundamental knowledge about data

configuration. The chapter is same as the Appendix in M900/M1800 Base Station

Controller Data Configuration Manual – Initial Configuration.

Target Readers

The manual is intended for the following readers:

z  Marketing staff 

z  Installation engineers & technicians

z  Operation & maintenance personnel

Conventions

This document uses the following conventions:

Page 8: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 8/283

I. General conventions

Convention Description

 Arial Normal paragraphs are in Arial.

 Arial Narrow  Warnings, cautions, notes and tips are in Arial Narrow.

Bold Headings, Command, Command Description are in boldface.

Terminal Display  Terminal Display is in Courier New; message input by the user via the terminal is inboldface.

II. Command conventions

Convention Description

italic font Command arguments for which you supply values are in italics.

[ ] Elements in square brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... }   Alternative keywords are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One isselected.

[ x | y | ... ]  Optional alternative keywords are grouped in square brackets and separated byvertical bars. One (or none) is selected. 

{ x | y | ... } *   Alternative keywords are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. Aminimum of one and maximum of all can be selected. 

[ x | y | ... ] *  Optional alternative keywords are grouped in square brackets and separated byvertical bars. Many (or none) are selected. 

!  A line starting with an exclamation mark is comments.

III. GUI conventions

Convention Description

< > Message entered via the terminal is within angle brackets.

[ ] MMIs, menu items, data table and field names are inside square brackets [ ].

/

Multi-level menus are separated by forward slashes (/). For example,

[File/Create/Folder].

IV. Keyboard operation

Format Description

<Key>Press the key with key name expressed with a pointed bracket, e.g. <Enter>,<Tab>, <Backspace>, or<A>.

<Key1+Key2>Press the keys concurrently; e.g. <Ctrl+Alt+A> means the three keys should bepressed concurrently.

Page 9: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 9/283

Format Description

<Key1, Key2> Press the keys in turn, e.g. <Alt, A>means the two keys should be pressed in turn.

[Menu Option]The item with a square bracket indicates the menu option, e.g. [System] option onthe main menu. The item with a pointed bracket indicates the functional buttonoption, e.g. <OK> button on some interface.

[Menu1/Menu2/Menu3]Multi-level menu options, e.g. [System/Option/Color setup] on the main menuindicates [Color Setup] on the menu option of [Option], which is on the menu optionof [System].

V. Mouse operation

Action Description

Click Press the left button or right button quickly (left button by default).

Double Click Press the left button twice continuously and quickly.

Drag Press and hold the left button and drag it to a certain position.

VI. Symbols

Eye-catching symbols are also used in this document to highlight the points worthy of 

special attention during the operation. They are defined as follows:

Caution, Warning, Danger : Means reader be extremely careful during the

operation.

  Note, Comment, Tip, Knowhow, Thought: Means a complementary description.

Page 10: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 10/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Table of Contents

 

i

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Overview....................................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1 Data Configuration Principle.............................................................................................. 1-1 1.2 Authority............................................................................................................................. 1-3 1.3 Operation Step................................................................................................................... 1-4 1.4 Start the BSC Data Auto Configuration System ................................................................ 1-4 1.5 Initial Data Configuration ................................................................................................... 1-9 

1.5.1 Start initial data configuration.................................................................................. 1-9 1.5.2 Introduction to the Main Interfaces........................................................................ 1-10 1.5.3 Data Backup and Reloading ................................................................................. 1-13 1.5.4 Modification of System Parameters ...................................................................... 1-17 1.5.5 Data Transfer and Conversion.............................................................................. 1-19 1.5.6 Export Network Parameter.................................................................................... 1-20 1.5.7 Import Network Parameter.................................................................................... 1-20 1.5.8 Report Cell Information to Server.......................................................................... 1-21 1.5.9 Operation Introduction........................................................................................... 1-21 

1.6 Dynamic Data Configuration............................................................................................ 1-24 1.6.1 Start Dynamic Data Configuration......................................................................... 1-25 1.6.2 Main Interface Introduction.................................................................................... 1-25 1.6.3 Data Backup.......................................................................................................... 1-27 1.6.4 Report Cell Information to Server.......................................................................... 1-27 1.6.5 Refresh Selected Tables....................................................................................... 1-28 1.6.6 Dynamic Configuration Procedure ........................................................................ 1-28 

1.7 Data Browsing.................................................................................................................. 1-29 1.8 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................... 1-31 

1.8.1 Troubleshooting with Starting................................................................................ 1-31 1.8.2 Troubleshooting about Dynamic Configuration..................................................... 1-35 

Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data .................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1 Modify BIE Visibility ........................................................................................................... 2-1 2.2 Modify LAPD Board's Visibility........................................................................................... 2-4 2.3 Modify BSC Interface Phase ID......................................................................................... 2-6 2.4 Modify Voice Optimization Parameter ............................................................................... 2-8 2.5 Modify BSC BIE CRC4 Check........................................................................................... 2-9 2.6 Configure Monitor Timeslot.............................................................................................. 2-11 2.7 Modify Abis Bypass Switch.............................................................................................. 2-16 2.8 Dynamic Configuration without Commands .................................................................... 2-18 

2.8.1 Trunk Circuits ........................................................................................................ 2-19 2.8.2 BTS Software Index .............................................................................................. 2-22 

Page 11: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 11/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Table of Contents

 

ii

2.8.3 Flow Control .......................................................................................................... 2-25 2.8.4 Common Parameter.............................................................................................. 2-26 2.8.5 Semi-Permanent Connection................................................................................ 2-28 2.8.6 Alarm Parameter ................................................................................................... 2-30

 2.8.7 GMEM Configuration............................................................................................. 2-32 2.8.8 Board Software Loading........................................................................................ 2-35 2.8.9 Timer Data............................................................................................................. 2-36 2.8.10 TMU Auto Activation Info .................................................................................... 2-38 

2.9 Import Network Parameters............................................................................................. 2-42 2.10 Export Network Parameters........................................................................................... 2-43 2.11 Modify Reserved Parameters ........................................................................................ 2-45 

Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data..................................................................................................... 3-1 3.1 Add a Site .......................................................................................................................... 3-1 3.2 Delete a Site .................................................................................................................... 3-15 3.3 Add TRX .......................................................................................................................... 3-20 3.4 Delete TRX ...................................................................................................................... 3-26 3.5 Add or Delete Board ........................................................................................................ 3-29 3.6 Modify Board Type........................................................................................................... 3-32 3.7 Modify Site Data............................................................................................................... 3-36 3.8 Modify Site's Output Property .......................................................................................... 3-39 3.9 Startup Traffic Stat. Task Re-register.............................................................................. 3-40 3.10 Rename Site or Cell.......................................................................................................3-42 3.11 Modify Ring Topology Mark........................................................................................... 3-44 

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data ..................................................................................................... 4-1 4.1 Add Cell ............................................................................................................................. 4-1 4.2 Delete Cell ......................................................................................................................... 4-7 4.3 Modify BCC and NCC...................................................................................................... 4-10 4.4 Modify Cell's Property...................................................................................................... 4-13 4.5 Modify Cell's Call Control Parameter............................................................................... 4-16 4.6 Modify Cell's Alarm Limit.................................................................................................. 4-18 4.7 Modify Cell's FH Property ................................................................................................ 4-20 4.8 Modify Cell's Handover Parameter.................................................................................. 4-25

 4.9 Modify Cell's Power Control Parameter........................................................................... 4-30 4.10 Modify Cell's Channel Management Parameter............................................................ 4-32 4.11 Modify Cell's CGI ........................................................................................................... 4-35 4.12 Modify Cell's System Information .................................................................................. 4-37 4.13 Modify Cell's Broadcast DRX Property .......................................................................... 4-41 4.14 Modify Cell's Install Status............................................................................................. 4-43 4.15 Modify Cell's Allocation Table (BA1 & BA2 Table) ........................................................ 4-45 4.16 Modify Double Timeslots Related Property ................................................................... 4-48 4.17 Modify TRX’s Property................................................................................................... 4-51 4.18 Modify DC Bias Voltage and RACH Min Access Level ................................................. 4-54 

Page 12: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 12/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Table of Contents

 

iii

4.19 Modify TRX’s Channel Type.......................................................................................... 4-56 4.20 Modify TRX's Frequency................................................................................................ 4-60 4.21 Modify GPRS Function .................................................................................................. 4-63 4.22 Modify TRX Priority........................................................................................................ 4-65

 4.23 External Cell................................................................................................................... 4-67 

4.23.1 Add External Cell ................................................................................................ 4-67 4.23.2 Delete External Cell ............................................................................................ 4-70 4.23.3 Modify External Cell ............................................................................................ 4-71 

4.24 Batch Modify Cell's Network Parameter ........................................................................ 4-74 4.25 Configure RSL Flow Control Parameter........................................................................ 4-77 

Appendix A Abbreviations ...........................................................................................................A-1 Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge.........................................................................................B-1 

B.1 BSC Data...........................................................................................................................B-1 B.1.1 Configuration Principles and Flow..........................................................................B-1 B.1.2 Numbering Principle ...............................................................................................B-2 B.1.3 AM/CM Data Configuration.....................................................................................B-5 B.1.4 BM Data Configuration ...........................................................................................B-7 

B.2 Clock Data Configuration ................................................................................................B-11 B.3 Trunk and Signaling on the A-interface...........................................................................B-12 B.4 BTS Networking...............................................................................................................B-14 

B.4.1 Principle of Numbering .........................................................................................B-14 B.4.2 Introduction to BIE ................................................................................................B-16 B.4.3 Star Networking ....................................................................................................B-18 B.4.4 Chain Networking..................................................................................................B-22 B.4.5 Tree Networking....................................................................................................B-39 B.4.6 Half Rate Networking............................................................................................B-40 B.4.7 Ring Networking....................................................................................................B-43 

Appendix C Correspondence Relation between Data Table and DBF Files............................C-1 

Page 13: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 13/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview

 

1-1

Chapter 1 Overview

BSC Data Auto Configuration System adopts a graphic operation interface. With the

introduction of graphic operation interface and operation in wizard, the task of data

configuration is simplified. The BSC Data Auto Configuration System offers initial data

configuration function and dynamic data configuration function. Moreover, it also

provides data browsing function.

To perform initial configuration, use the mouse and keyboard to perform operations to

the equipment objects, such as BIEs, sites, TRXs and cells, in graphic interface, then

input necessary data configuration information to complete the data configuration.

Complex trunk and networking data are generated automatically. The cell, power 

control and channel management data adopt default configuration and can be

adjusted automatically according to actual practice if necessary. The initial data

configuration process is efficient and easy to learn.

Operation tasks for dynamic data configuration are categorized according to the

on-site demands. Each task adopts wizard mode to instruct the user to complete the

complicated in-service system configuration and network parameter adjustment. The

system generates commands for dynamic configuration according to the operation

tasks the user selects.

1.1 Data Configuration Principle

I. Data Configuration Path

There are two paths to start BSC Data Auto Configuration System:

1) Start BSC Data Auto Configuration System from OMC system. In this path, we also

have two choices:

z  With OMC Server, user connects to OMC Server through OMC Shell, and then

start BSC Data Auto Configuration System.

z  Without OMC Server, users start OMC Local WS, select the IP address of BAM,

and then start BSC Data Auto Configuration System.

2) Start BSC Data Auto Configuration System from iManager M2000 System. There

are also two choices:

z  With M2000 Server, user connects to M2000 Server through iManager M2000,

and then start BSC Data Auto Configuration System.

z  Without M2000 Server, users start Local WS, select the IP address of BAM, and

then start BSC Data Auto Configuration System.

Page 14: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 14/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview

 

1-2

Either with OMC Server(M2000 Server) or not, when BSC Data Auto Configuration

System launch, system download autocfg.dat from FTP Server at BAM to WS (Work

Station) with FTP (File Transfer Protocol); after accomplish transfer and conversion,

or accomplish dynamic configuration, load autocfg.dat from WS to FTP Server.

Data configuration principle of BSC is shown in Figure 1-1.

OMC Server OMC Shell

BAM

BSC Data Auto

Configuration

System

DBF

WS

Local WS

IP

IP

IP

FTP Server 

FTP  AutoCfg.dat

(iManager M2000)

OMC Server 

(M2000 Server)

 

Figure 1-1 Data configuration principle of the BSC data auto configuration system

II. Data Category

BSC data includes BSC Data Auto Configuration System data, BAM data and FAM

data.

z  BSC Data Auto Configuration System data is used when graphic data

configuration interfaces are adopted. They are saved in the file AutoCfg.dat inC:\OMC\BSC\BAM\dload\cfgdata. The data configuration files of BSC Data Auto

Configuration System are transferred from the Client to the designated directory

of BAM via FTP.

z  BAM data are also saved at BAM in *.DBF and *.DAT format. *.DBF files are

saved in C:\OMC\BSC\BAM\dbf and system table files are saved in

C:\OMC\BSC\BAM\DBF\SYSTEM. The data converted from *.DBF are saved in

the directory C:\OMC\BSC\BAM\DLOAD, with the file name as DB_*.DAT. "*" of 

DB_*.DAT represents module Number and one module corresponds to one data

file. Files after format conversion can be transferred to the GMPU of BSC via

channels between FAM and BAM during BSC loading or data setting.

z  FAM data refer to the data saved in GMPU, adopting binary system.

Caution:

Except data for modules, there are also such important files as cc08.bsm, cc08.ctn, cc08.mcm,

cc08.mcs and cc08.snt under DLOAD directory. Data under DLOAD directory cannot be deleted and

modified through Windows Explorer during routine maintenance.

Page 15: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 15/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview

 

1-3

The relationship between various kinds of data is illustrated in Figure 1-2.

*.dbf  Autocfg.dat DB_*.DAT

BAM

Transfer  Convertbin

Load

GMPU  

Figure 1-2 The relationship between various kinds of data

During initial configuration, if it wants to be saved, select [File/Backup Data to] to save

the current modification. After the file for data configuration is saved, if the system

exits service abnormally before data transfer and conversion, select [File/Reload Data

from] to recover the data modified.

In initial configuration, after all the data are configured, perform transfer operation to

convert the BSC Data Auto Configuration System data into DBF format. Then convertthe DBF data into *.DAT format with conversion operation. Then finally reset all the

modules to load the data.

Note:

The file saving path in this manual refers to the default path for software installation, if there is no

dedicated description about the path.

1.2 Authority

To guarantee the stable operation of the system, strict operation authority system is

designed for the BSC Data Auto Configuration System.

I. Advanced User 

The advanced users enjoy the highest operation authority of the BSC Data Auto

Configuration System. They can implement all data configuration. Advanced users of 

BSC Data Auto Configuration System include users with Service Setting Authority,

users with Management Authority, users with OMC Setting Authority and users with

OMC Management Authority.

II. Ordinary User 

The ordinary users can only browse data. Ordinary users of BSC Data Auto

Configuration System refer to users with Service Query Authority.

Page 16: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 16/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview

 

1-4

Caution:

To avoid the bad impact on system for wrong data configuration or improper operation, user authority

management must be enforced properly. Different user must use different user name and password. It is

recommended that personnel proficient in the system are configured as Advanced User.

1.3 Operation Step

1) Backup AutoCfg.dat and *.dbf at BAM. The file path for AutoCfg.dat is

C:\OMC\BSC\BAM\dload\cfgdata; the file path for *.dbf is C:\OMC\BSC\BAM\dbf.

2) Prepare detailed data modification procedures and recovery measures if theoperation fails.

3) For critical dynamic configuration, first perform it in simulating environment and

check whether the refreshed DBF data table is correct, If it is correctly refreshed,

perform the operation again in actual environment.

4) If abnormality occurs during initial configuration transferring or conversion and

the operation fails, repeat the operation until it succeeds.

5) For abnormality during dynamic configuration, please refer to 1.8.2

Troubleshooting about Dynamic Configuration.

Note:

The data file AutoCfg.dat of BSC Data Auto Configuration System is saved at the directory

C:\OMC\BSC\BAM\dload\cfgdata at BAM and the system automatically backs up the file AutoCfg.dat at

3 a.m. every day.

The location of backup file: C:\Omc\SHELL\G3BSC32.10100.06.1120A\SYSDATA,

"G3BSC32.10100.06.1120A" corresponds to the software version. The style of backup file is

"030427031420.Dat", the numbers indicate "Year Month Day Hour Minute Second", each unit use two

digits.

1.4 Start the BSC Data Auto Configuration System

I. Start the BSC Data Auto Configuration System from OMC Shell

Enter the main interface [Huawei GSM OMC SHELL]. Select the corresponding BSC

icon and right-click it, the menu will appear as shown in Figure 1-3.

Page 17: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 17/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview

 

1-5

Figure 1-3 Enter the BSC system menu

Select the [Data Configuration]. The BSC Data Auto Configuration System will obtain

data from FTP Server and enter the work mode selection interface after successful

loading, as shown in Figure 1-8.

II. Start the BSC Data Auto Configuration System from iManager M2000

Enter the main interface [iManager M2000 Integrated Network Management System].

Select the corresponding BSC icon and right-click it, the menu will appear as shown

in Figure 1-4.

Page 18: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 18/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview

 

1-6

Figure 1-4 Enter the BSC system menu from iManager M2000

Select the [Data Auto Configuration], the interface as shown in Figure 1-5 will pop up.

Figure 1-5 Enter the NE Login interface

Page 19: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 19/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview

 

1-7

Input the user name and password which can login this BSC from Local WS, and click

<OK>, the BSC Data Auto Configuration System will obtain data from FTP Server and

enter the work mode selection interface after successful loading, as shown in

Figure 1-8.

III. Start the BSC Data Auto Configuration System from OMC Local WS

Select the [Start/Programs/Huawei GSM-OMC/OMC Local WS], select the IP address

of object for maintenance, as shown in Figure 1-6.

Figure 1-6 Select the BSC object for maintenance

In Figure 1-6, Click <Configure>, user can implement <Add>, <Delete> and <Update>

to object. "Name" and "IP" constitute each object. "Name" is input by user according

to the need, "IP" is input with the IP address of BAM to be maintained.

Select the object to be maintained, click <OK>, the interface of [Log in] will pop up.

Input the correct "User" and "Password", click <OK>, to enter OMC Local WS.

Select the [Start/Task/Data Configuration], as shown in Figure 1-7.

Figure 1-7 Start the BSC Data Auto Configuration System from OMC Local WS

 After the BSC Data Auto Configuration System starts, it will download the data from

the FTP server in the BAM. If the data downloading and loading is successful, the

system will enter the work mode selection interface after loading data successfully, as

shown in Figure 1-8.

Page 20: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 20/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview

 

1-8

Figure 1-8 Select the work mode of the BSC Data Auto Configuration System

Caution:

1) The data file AutoCfg.dat of BSC Data Auto Configuration System is saved in BAM, therefore, the

system always obtains data from BAM to ensure data integrity and consistency whether the BSC Data

 Auto Configuration System is started from OMC Local Ws or OMC Shell.

2) Some critical operations, such as data transferring, dynamic configuration and setting specified data

table etc., will refresh the default data file AutoCfg.dat, therefore, data file AutoCfg.dat backup is

recommended before these critical operations.

IV. Enter the BSC Data Auto Configuration System the first time

 After the OMC software is installed and the user enters the BSC Data Auto

Configuration System the first time, the BSC Data Auto Configuration System will

prompt the user to exit if there is no Autocfg.dat in BAM, as shown in Figure 1-9.

Figure 1-9 Prompt information if there is no Autocfg.dat in BAM

Under this case, solve the problem according to the description given in 1.8

Troubleshooting "No data for BSC Data Auto Configuration System in BAM FTP

Server of BAM".

Page 21: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 21/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview

 

1-9

1.5 Initial Data Configuration

Cautions:

1) The Initial Data Configuration is only being used in data configuration for new office deployment and

massive upgrading for office points.

2) After data transmission under initial data configuration mode, data conversion and BSC reset must be

performed to load the newly generated data. Otherwise, data inconsistency between Host (GMPU), DBF,

and BSC Data Auto Configuration System may occur.

Initial Data Configuration, the subscriber can finish hardware configuration on graphic

interfaces. Meanwhile, the system provides default data configuration and correlative

data through auto operation. The system also supports effective check on the inputs

of users. The subscriber only needs to input limited information of data configuration

to complete the whole data configuration for the BSC.

1.5.1 Start initial data configuration

 As the advanced users (users with Service Setting Authority, users with Management

 Authority, users with OMC Setting Authority and users with OMC Management

 Authority) have obtained the BAM edit authority, start the BSC Data AutoConfiguration System, the work mode selection interface will pop up, as shown in

Figure 1-8. Press <Ctrl+Shift+F8> and the password authentication interface will

appear, as shown in Figure 1-10.

Figure 1-10 Password input box of the initial data configuration mode

 After the correct password is input, click <OK>, the work mode selection interface will

become as shown in Figure 1-11.

Page 22: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 22/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview

 

1-10

Figure 1-11 The activated work mode selection interface

1.5.2 Introduction to the Main Interfaces

I. Overview

The initial configuration mode of the BSC Data Auto Configuration System provides

the simple and easy-to-use GUI (Graphic User Interface). The users can configure

the corresponding BSS engineering data, trunk data, signaling data, service data and

alarm data according to the actual networking and planning requirements.

The configured data can be loaded directly to the GMPU after such operations as

transmitting and converting.

II. Main Interface

 After successfully loading data of the BSC Data Auto Data Configuration system,

select "Initial data configuration work mode" and enter the main interface of initial

configuration, as shown in Figure 1-12.

Page 23: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 23/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview

 

1-11

Figure 1-12 Main interface of initial configuration

The main interface of initial configuration consists of seven parts, i.e., the title bar, the

menu options, the toolbar, the object list, the object information, the object labels,

object property.

III. Title bar 

It displays the title of the main interface.

IV. Menu

The menu options of initial configuration are shown in Table 1-1.

Table 1-1 Functions of the main menus of initial configuration

Menu option Function File

Including some function items of the BSC Data Auto Configuration System, such as systemsetting, data backup, data loading, transfer, conversion, etc.

ViewSet the switches of the status volume, the tool bar. View the cell networking mode and quickquery the cell and site.

HelpThe on-line help and version and copyright information of the BSC Data Auto ConfigurationSystem.

Page 24: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 24/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview

 

1-12

V. Toolbar 

The tool bar of initial data configuration is shown in Figure 1-13.

Figure 1-13 Icons of the tool bar 

The meanings of the various tool bar icons are shown in Table 1-2.

Table 1-2 Meanings of the tool bar icons

Tool Icon Function Set the device type (single-mode device/multi-modes device) and the number of 

modules of the multi-modes device. As for single-mode device, select whether to usethe SM multiplex mode or not.

Transfer the BSC data configured in the BSC Data Auto Configuration System to BAM.Refresh DBF data. After transferring the data successfully, it is mandatory to convert thedata and reset BSC.

Convert the DBF data of BAM to DAT file so that the host can read the data.

Refresh the data configured in the BSC Data Auto Configuration System. This button isnot usable by default.

Display the version and copyright information of the BSC Data Auto ConfigurationSystem.

VI. Object labels

The labels include those of the local office information, the hardware devices, the site

devices, the cell property, and the cell networking, etc. The meanings of the labels are

shown in Table 1-3.

Table 1-3 Meanings of the object labels

Object label Function Local officeinformation

Configure the data of the local office. Meanwhile, maintain the tables of alarm parameters,SPC, site software index, common parameters and flow control, etc.

HardwareDisplay the currently selected AM/CM. BM hardware configuration. It can implement theoperations of adding, deleting board and frame, etc. And configure the properties of thecorresponding board.

Site deviceDisplay the currently selected site hardware configuration. It can implement the operations of adding, deleting board, etc. User can also configure the properties of the corresponding boardhere.

Cell propertyConfigure cell data, including CGI, BCC and NCC, effective frequencies, optimizing networkdata, and FH data, etc.

Cell adjacentrelationship

Display all the cell networking structure and adjacent relations, etc.

Page 25: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 25/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview

 

1-13

VII. Object list

Object navigation tree. It displays all the modules, sites, cell object lists in the array of 

modules, sites and cell structures.

VIII. Object information

Object information is displayed for the objects selected by the user in object list. If the

object selected is site, object information including site name, site ID, site type and

number of racks will be displayed. If the object selected is cell, cell name and cell

Number will be displayed. If the object selected is board, board type, board No.,

frame Number and slot Number will be displayed.

1.5.3 Data Backup and Reloading

I. Overview

Save and backup data can be performed to the server or the WS and the function of 

data reloading is also usable. See Table 1-4.

Table 1-4 Sub-menu options of data saving and backup

Menu option Function Backup data to the server 

Backup data to FTP server at BAM. User can select the name of the backup file.

Usually it is not allowed to cover the AutoCfg.dat. It is applicable to initialconfiguration and dynamic configuration.

Backup data to the localBackup data in WS. User can select the name of the backup file. Usually it is notallowed to cover the AutoCfg.dat. It is applicable to initial configuration anddynamic configuration. 

Reload data from the server Reload all the configuration information of the BSC Data Auto ConfigurationSystem from the data saved at the BAM (the file name is selectable). It isapplicable to the initial configuration mode.

Reload data from the localReload all the configuration data of the BSC Data Auto Configuration Systemfrom the data saved at the WS (the file name is selectable). It is applicable to theinitial configuration mode.

The data saving and recovery mechanism of BSC Data Auto Configuration System

has nothing related to the user login mode (whether log in from OMC Shell or OMC

Local WS). No matter where the users log in the system, BSC Data Auto

Configuration System will save the data in the FTP Server of the BAM.

The BSC Data Auto Configuration System saves the data into a designated directory

of the BAM to ensure the security, validity and exclusiveness of the data source.

Note:

Server described in the above is BAM, because FTP Server is running at BAM, it is called server of BSC

Data Auto Configuration System.

Page 26: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 26/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview

 

1-14

II. Data Backup and Reloading

1) Backup data to the server 

Select the [File/Backup Data to/FTP Server], the interface will pop up as shown in

Figure 1-14. The user may select the name of the saved file. However, it is not

allowed to cover or delete the default data file AutoCfg.dat.

Figure 1-14 Backup data to the server  

If the user selects to save using the file name AutoCfg.dat, the system will prompt the

following information, as shown in Figure 1-15.

Figure 1-15 Confirm of covering the default configuration file

Note:

The backup file is saved at "C:\Omc\BSC\BAM\dload\cfgdata" of BAM.

2) Backup data to the WS

Page 27: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 27/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview

 

1-15

Select [File/Backup Data to/Local], the interface will pop up as shown in Figure 1-16.

The user may select the name of the saved file. But it is not allowed to cover the

default data file AutoCfg.dat or other system files under this directory.

Figure 1-16 Backup data at the WS

If the user selects AutoCfg.dat or other system file names for saving, the system will

prompt the information as shown in Figure 1-17 respectively.

Figure 1-17 Confirm of covering the system file

3) Reload data from the FTP server 

In the initial configuration mode, select [File/Reload Data from/FTP Server], theinterface will pop up as shown in Figure 1-18. The user may select any file name for 

data reloading.

Page 28: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 28/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview

 

1-16

Figure 1-18 Recover data from the server  

4) Reload data from the WSSelect the [File/Reload Data From/Local], the interface will pop up as shown in

Figure 1-19. It is only allowed to select data configuration files for reloading. Under 

this directory, there are also a lot of system configuration files, which cannot be

deleted.

Figure 1-19 Reload data from the WS 

If the file name for data reloading selected by the user does not meet the related

requirements, e.g., the data file is not complete or is not data configuration file, the

system will prompt the following information. See Figure 1-20.

Page 29: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 29/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview

 

1-17

Figure 1-20 Reload data from the WS failed

III. AutoCfg.dat Loading Procedure

When the BSC Data Auto Configuration System is started from OMC Shell, it first

downloads AutoCfg.Dat data file from BAM to the sysdata directory in WS, the original

 AutoCfg.Dat data file in the WS is overwritten. And then it loads all the data from AutoCfg.Dat file in the sysdata directory in WS, i.e., generates all the configuration

information displayed in the graphic interfaces. If the connection to the BAM is

interrupted, or the application in FTP Server in BAM is not started, the BSC Data Auto

Configuration System will prompt the user to automatically exit the application.

Caution:

Some important operations such as data transfer or dynamic setting, etc., will refresh the default data file

 AutoCfg.dat. Therefore, it is recommended to backup the AutoCfg.dat before these operations.

1.5.4 Modification of System Parameters

I. Overview

The function of modifying system parameters enables the users to modify some

parameter values, including transfer, conversion, dynamic setting timeout threshold,

the number of communication frame sliding windows for adding or deleting DBF data,

etc. so as to improve efficiency of the BSC Data Auto Configuration System. It is

recommended not to easily change these parameters at random. The default values

can be used generally.

II. Introduction to the Operations

In the menu bar of the main interface of the BSC Data Auto Configuration System,

click [File/Set System Property]. The dialog will pop up as shown in Figure 1-21.

Page 30: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 30/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview

 

1-18

Figure 1-21 Modifying the system parameters

The user can modify the system timeout properties in the interface.

Set system timeout property including the timeout properties setting of transfer,conversion, dynamic setting, etc. The meanings of the various properties are shown

in Table 1-5.

Table 1-5 Meanings of the various properties of system timeout

System Property Meaning Single message timeoutthreshold (ms)

Set the timeout threshold of single message. Modification of the value will affecttimeout of the transfer operation (for details, refer to Note). The value can be larger properly when the network status is poor. The default value is 200.

Flow control slide windowfor adding data

Set the number of slide windows for adding data. Control flow of the BAM. If the dataof BAM are too large, the value can be decreased properly so as to decrease impact

to flow load of BAM. The default value is 12.Flow control slide windowfor deleting data

Set the number of slide windows for deleting data. Control flow of the BAM. If the dataof BAM are too large, the value can be decreased properly so as to decrease impactto flow load of BAM. The default value is 2.  

BAM data table conversiontimeout property(s)

Set the timeout of transfer. The value can be increased properly when the networkstatus is poor. The default value is 60.

Dynamic setting timeoutthreshold(s)

Set the timeout of dynamic setting. The value can be increased properly when thenetwork status is poor. The default value is 120. 

Lock BAM TimeoutThreshold(s)

Set the timeout of BSC Data Auto Configuration System locking BAM. The value canbe increased properly when the network status is poor. The default vlue is 5.

Page 31: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 31/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview

 

1-19

Note:

It takes long time for BAM to execute the OMC_DELETE command. Therefore, the number of Flow

control slide window for deleting data cannot be set too large.

1.5.5 Data Transfer and Conversion

I. Overview

The data configured in the BSC Data Auto Configuration System can be transferred to

BAM with the transfer operation. Refresh the entire DBF table of BAM. Then convert

the DBF data of BAM to the file that can be loaded to GMPU in the BSC host. Resetthe BSC and load the data.

II. Procedure Introduction

1) Operation procedure of transferring data

z  System firstly verifies if all the data are correct (e.g., whether the CGI is repetitive,

whether the RC has been allocated with frequencies, etc). Calculate all the data

according to the current configuration, (e.g., the Number of various boards, radio

channel configuration table, LAPD signal connection table and LAPD semi-fixed

connection table, etc).

z  Send OMC_DELETE communication frame to BAM. Clear all the DBF data of 

BAM by BAM. If the data table to be refreshed is specified, the data table to be

cleared is the specified data table.

z   According to the current configuration information, the BSC Data Auto

Configuration System will automatically calculate the data to be filled into the

DBF data table and encapsulate them to data frames and send to BAM. Then

BAM will fill the data to the data tables.

z   After the entire transfer operation, the BSC Data Auto Configuration System will

automatically save the AutoCfg.Dat at WS, and then load it to FTP Server with

FTP.

z  If it is unsuccessful to load file to FTP Server, don't exit the BSC Data Auto

Configuration System, and keep the locking of current client to BAM. After 

resolve the fault of FTP Server, Select [File/Backup Data to/FTP Server], select

autocfg.dat for the file name.

2) Operation procedure of data conversion

 After the transfer in the BSC Data Auto Configuration System, user must implement

conversion and resetting of whole BSC. System sends a converting command to

BAM. Then, BAM will implement data conversion.

Page 32: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 32/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview

 

1-20

1.5.6 Export Network Parameter 

I. Overview

The network parameter configured in the BSC Data Auto Configuration System can

be export to designated file. It can be used to save the network parameter based on

actual environment.

II. Procedure Introduction

1) Select [File/Export Network Parameter], as shown in Figure 1-22.

Figure 1-22 Export Network Parameter 

2) Select designated cell, click <Export Parameter>, save the network parameter of 

designated cells.

1.5.7 Import Network Parameter 

I. Overview

The Network Parameter can be imported into the BSC Data Auto Configuration

System. It used to reuse the data exported from later version.

II. Procedure Introduction

1) Select [File/Import Network Parameter], and then select the designated file.

2) Click <Open> to complete the importing.

Page 33: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 33/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview

 

1-21

1.5.8 Report Cell Information to Server 

I. Overview

 After transferring data in initial data configuration. system report automatically cell

information to OMC Server for traffic statistic. User can manually report all cell

information of BSC to OMC Server by selecting [File/Report Cell Information to

Server],.

II. Procedure Introduction

Select [File/Report Cell Information to Server] to complete the operation.

1.5.9 Operation Introduction

I. Operation of data transfer 

In the toolbar of the main interface of the BSC Data Auto Configuration System, click

or select [File/Transfer Data Table]. The following dialog box as shown in

Figure 1-23 will pop up.

Figure 1-23 Interface of transfer data operation

In this interface, press <Ctrl + Shift + F6>, activate <Yes>.

Click <Yes> to implement the data transfer operation, as shown in Figure 1-24.

Figure 1-24 Box indicating the process of data transfer 

Page 34: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 34/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview

 

1-22

Caution:

During the transfer procedure, it is prohibited to exit in a forced manner from the transfer operations,

including such operations as shutting down, exiting from the BSC Data Auto Configuration System in a

forced manner, etc. In case of power failure during the refreshing procedure, it is mandatory to

re-implement data operation after the power is recovered. It is mandatory that this operation must

succeed for one time.

If the network status is poor, and the refreshing procedure exits due to timeout, the

following dialog box will appear as shown in Figure 1-25.

Figure 1-25 Prompt box of timeout of the transfer operation

In this case, add properly the single message timeout threshold (ms).

When data transfer is completed, the dialog box as shown in Figure 1-26 will appear,

indicating that transfer has succeeded.

Figure 1-26 Transferring data succeeded

II. Operation of data conversion

In the toolbar of the main interface of initial configuration of the BSC Data Auto

Configuration System, click or select [File/Convert Data Table]. The dialog

box as shown in Figure 1-27 will pop up.

Page 35: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 35/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview

 

1-23

Figure 1-27 Interface of data conversion

In this interface, press <Ctrl + Shift + F6>, activate <Yes>.

Click <Yes> to implement the data conversion operation, as shown in Figure 1-28.

Figure 1-28 Box indicating the process of data conversion

 After the conversion operation is completed, the dialog box as shown in Figure 1-29

will pop up.

Figure 1-29 Converting data succeeded

Click <OK> to complete the data conversion operation. Reset BSC to load data and

complete the entire data configuration.

Conversion may fail if the network status is poor. The dialog box shown in Figure 1-30

will appear.

Page 36: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 36/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview

 

1-24

Figure 1-30 Prompt box of timeout of the conversion operation

In this case, increase the timeout threshold of BAM data table conversion.

III. View value range

During initial configuration or dynamic configuration, users can conveniently view the

value range of parameters. Move the cursor to the edit box of a parameter, the value

range of the parameter will be displayed after a while, as shown in Figure 1-31.

Figure 1-31 View parameter value range

1.6 Dynamic Data Configuration

Dynamic Data Configuration enables the user to modify the data of the GMPU and

BTS without resetting the GMPU in the BSC.

The Dynamic data configuration adopts the wizard operation mode, guiding the user 

to complete the complicated on-line BSS system configuration and dynamically

modify the network parameters. Dynamic data configuration applies a reasonably

arranged Man-Machine Interface for the user to fill in configuration data step by step.

The BSC Data Auto Configuration System then sends data frames of operation data

Page 37: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 37/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview

 

1-25

table to BAM. The BAM finishes the entire data configuration for BSC offices by

adding, deleting, and modifying the data tables in BAM.

Generally it is used in daily maintenance, such as dynamic addition/deletion of BTS,

cell and RC, dynamic modification of the network optimization parameters.

1.6.1 Start Dynamic Data Configuration

In Figure1-6 select the work mode of the BSC Data Auto Configuration System, and

then select "System dynamical configuration work mode". An interface requiring

password input will pop up, as shown in Figure 1-32.

Figure 1-32 Dynamic data configuration password input

Input the correct password and click <OK>, enter the main interface of dynamic

configuration. As shown in Figure 1-33.

1.6.2 Main Interface Introduction

 Apart from those common parts of an interface, such as title bar, menu and tool bar,

etc. The interface of dynamic data configuration adopts a wizard operation mode.

Each dynamic configuration operation usually includes several successive steps. The

"Operation Step" displays all steps necessary for the operation. The name of current

configuration step is displayed in blue.

Page 38: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 38/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview

 

1-26

Figure 1-33 Dynamic data configuration working mode main interface

I. Menu

Menu option Function

OptionContains such functional items as system configuration, data backup, data loading and

Refresh Selected Tables, etc. for Dynamic data configuration system.BSC Contains the Dynamic setting operation items at BSC level.

Site Contains the Dynamic setting operation items at BTS level.

Cell Contains the Dynamic setting operation items at cell level.

Help Contains version of the BSC Data Auto Configuration System.

II. Toolbar 

Tool icon Function

The system attributes is used to control the flow and communication timeout whilethe BSC Data Auto Configuration System communicates with BAM

Used for Reloading data from the autocfg.dat at WS.

Exit BSC Data Auto Configuration System

III. Task Name

Display the name of current executing dynamical configuration task.

Page 39: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 39/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview

 

1-27

IV. Operation Step

Display all the operation step to accomplish a dynamical configuration task, the

executing step is displayed in blue.

V. Operation Interface

It is the display area of the wizard operation interface. All operation of a dynamical

configuration task is completed in the area.

VI. Status Bar 

The greeting message and the information about the company are displayed in this

area.

1.6.3 Data Backup

The data backup function is provided in the dynamic configuration mode. The data

backup includes [Backup Data to/FTP Server] and [Backup Data to/Local]. As shown

in Figure 1-34.

Figure 1-34 Data backup menu

The data backup operation is the same as that described in 1.5.3 Data Backup and

Reloading.

1.6.4 Report Cell Information to Server 

 After dynamic adding/deleting site, dynamic adding/deleting cell, or dynamic

modifying cell CGI, etc. system report automatically cell information to OMC Server 

for Traffic Statistic. Select [Option/Report Cell Information to Server], user can

manually report all cell information of BSC to OMC Server.

Page 40: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 40/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview

 

1-28

1.6.5 Refresh Selected Tables

To avoid the DBF be empty in BAM because of network or FTP failure, the Dynamic

Data Configuration System supports refreshing selected tables to make the DBF inBAM consistent to the data of Dynamic Data Configuration System, To perform this

function, the user can select [Option/Refresh Selected Tables], then the interface as

shown in Figure 1-35 will pop up.

Figure 1-35 Refresh Selected Tables

First, the user select options, then select the tables to be refreshed from “Table List 0”

to “Refresh Tables 0”, and the user can select whether the selected tables should be

set to host. At last, click the button <OK> to complete the operation.

1.6.6 Dynamic Configuration Procedure

I. With command

BSC Data Auto Configuration System generates all data for BSC table according to

this dynamic configuration. BAM data table will be refreshed according to the

corresponding ID of the Command word. "Refresh" means to clear the data table first,

then to fill in all data record generated this time in turn. The Command word is

requested to be filled into the Command Reference Table, then the corresponding

data table and command line parameter will be set to the present module (BM), and

Page 41: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 41/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview

 

1-29

data will be stored into the configuration files of the BSC Data Auto Configuration

System. The step is described as the first setting in the following text.

If part of the data tables need to be sent to all modules (BM), the BSC Data Auto

Configuration System will refresh these data tables and clear the record in the table of 

command line parameters. Then these data tables (including the empty table of 

command line parameters) will then be set to all modules (BM), and configuration

data will again be stored into the configuration files of the BSC Data Auto

Configuration System. The step is described as the second setting in the following

text.

Sending data tables to all modules is also called Inter-module Broadcast.

Secondary setting can be performed for the following dynamic operations. Such as

add/delete sites, add/delete cells, add/delete TRXs, add/delete external cells, modifyexternal cell property, modify interface phase flag, modify cell handover parameters,

modify cell FH attributes, modify cell BCC and NCC, modify TRX channel type,

modify TRX frequencies, modify cell installation status and modify voice optimization

parameters.

The procedure of batch modify cell parameters is same as the procedure described in

above. System generates the corresponding commands, the configuration procedure

is determined by the commands.

II. Without command

BSC Data Auto Configuration System generates all data for BSC table according to

this dynamic configuration without command. BAM data table will be refreshed

according to the corresponding ID of the current configuration. And then the

corresponding data table will be set to all BM, and data will be stored into the

configuration files of the BSC Data Auto Configuration System.

1.7 Data Browsing

Main interface of data browsing working mode is the same as that of the initial dataconfiguration. This makes it convenient for user to understand the present BSC

networking architecture and network planning data.

In the browsing mode, user is allowed to perform modification to the system

configuration, but all changes will not be saved.

Click<Transfer>, the interface will pop up, as shown in Figure 1-36.

Page 42: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 42/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview

 

1-30

Figure 1-36 Information prompting that data cannot be transferred

Click <Convert>, the interface shown in Figure 1-37 will pop up.

Figure 1-37 Information prompting that data cannot be converted

Select [File/Backup Data to/FTP Server] or [Backup Data to/Local], the interface

shown in Figure 1-38 will pop up.

Figure 1-38 Information prompting that data cannot be saved

In the case of system maintenance and engineer training, this mode can be adopted

to prevent the operators from mis-operating the system.

Note:

It is recommended to use the browse mode when viewing the networking data even for the advanced

user, so as to prevent any mis-operation which may affect the normal running of the BSC.

Page 43: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 43/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview

 

1-31

1.8 Troubleshooting

1.8.1 Troubleshooting with Starting

I. Loading Fault

If information shown in Figure 1-39 appears when the BSC Data Auto Configuration

System is started, it indicates data loading failure.

Figure 1-39 BSC Data Auto Configuration System start failure information

There are two causes for this failure:

One is that the FTP Server has not been started. Check whether there is FTP Server 

icon in Tray of Task Bar in BAM Windows, as shown in Figure 1-40. If the FTP Server 

has not been started, double click the Ftps.exe under the directory

C:\OMC\BSC\BAM. 

Figure 1-40 FTP Server in-service icon

The second cause is poor network quality. Since the BSC Data Auto Configuration

System obtains data first from the BAM when it is started, it might fail to obtain data if 

the network quality is poor. To solve this problem, just wait for a while, then restart the

BSC Data Auto Configuration System.

II. Version not identical

When the BSC Data Auto Configuration System loads data, it will implement

consistency checking of the version of AutoCfg.dat and the version of the current BSC

Data Auto Configuration System. If they are inconsistent, the following warning will

pop up, as shown in Figure 1-41.

Page 44: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 44/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview

 

1-32

Figure 1-41 Inconsistency between the program version and the data version

Click <OK>. BSC Data Auto Configuration System is downward compatible, if the

version of the current BSC data auto configuration system is higher than the version

of the configuration file (AutoCfg.dat), the program can run normally. Otherwise, theprompt of unknown object will appear. The BSC Data Auto Configuration System

might become abnormal and cannot be used.

Note:

1) Please update the version of the BSC Data Auto Configuration System and make it matching with the

data version. If the problem appears during upgrading, ignore the prompt.

2) After transfer operation is performed in BSC Data Auto Configuration System, the version of the

program and that of the data become consistent. Therefore, the prompt information as shown in

Figure 1-41 will not appear again.

III. No data for BSC Data Auto Configuration System in BAM FTP Server of 

BAM

When the user first starts the BSC Data Auto Configuration System and there is no

configuration file of the BSC Data Auto Configuration System in the BAM FTP Server,

the BSC Data Auto Configuration System will prompt the user to automatically exit the

system. Under this case, the user can copy the old AutoCfg.Dat file to the directory

C:\OMC\BSC\BAM\DLOAD\CFGDATA in BAM (this is the directory specified for file

transferring in FTP Server). If there is no old AutoCfg.Dat file, the user can edit any

non-empty data file and save it as AutoCfg.Dat file, then copy it to this directory. The

BSC Data Auto Configuration System will be started normally and prompts the user to

create default data, as shown in Figure 1-42.

Page 45: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 45/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview

 

1-33

Figure 1-42 Information prompting incomplete data file

Click <OK>, the user can enter the interface shown in Figure 1-43 to select the

working mode of the configuration system.

Figure 1-43 Select working mode of the configuration system

In this interface, "System Dynamic Configuration Work Mode" is unusable, for the

data the system creates by default is that of a single module BSC and the dynamicdata configuration mode is prohibited to prevent users from setting incorrect data to

the GMPU.

Users can start initial data configuration in the BSC Data Auto Configuration System

to edit and transfer the data, convert and load data to GMPU. Then restart the BSC

Data Auto Configuration System, and "System Dynamic Configuration Work Mode"

can be usable.

IV. Login authority

The login authority of the BSC Data Auto Configuration System is based on the user 

management authority of OMC Shell or OMC Local WS. The advanced users ( users

with Service Setting Authority, users with Management Authority, users with OMC

Setting Authority and users with OMC Management Authority) can enter any work

mode of the BSC Data Auto Configuration System. If the user does not have the

authority to log in OMC Shell or OMC Local WS, the following information may appear,

as shown in Figure 1-44.

Page 46: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 46/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview

 

1-34

Figure 1-44 Prompt when the user without authority to start the BSC Data Auto Configuration System

Click <OK>, the user can only enter the view data configuration work mode of the

BSC Data Auto Configuration System, as shown in Figure 1-45.

Figure 1-45 The user can only enter the view data configuration work mode

Caution:

To endure the stable service of BSS, OMC grants different levels of authority to its users, and the BSC

Data Auto Configuration System also provides password authentication mechanism. Only users who

have passed the password authentication of the BSC Data Auto Configuration System can be allowed to

start dynamic configuration or initial configuration.

V. Edit lock of the BSC Data Auto Configuration System

DBF data chaos may be caused if multiple clients implement data configuration of the

same BAM simultaneously. Therefore, only the login users who have the OMC

management authority and data setting authority can perform BAM edit lock. All the

other login users of other clients can only enter the "View data configuration work

mode" of the BSC Data Auto Configuration System. The following prompt will appear 

as shown in Figure 1-46 when the user who does not have the edit lock authority

starts the BSC Data Auto Configuration System.

Page 47: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 47/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview

 

1-35

Figure 1-46 Data configuration on the BAM that is locked

The IP address of login computer and the user name is displayed in Figure 1-46.

Only after the client exit the BSC Data Auto Configuration System, the BAM will be

unlocked, new users can reenter the system and obtain the authority of data

modification.

If the Client with editing authority exits abnormally, find the corresponding computer of 

the Client according to the IP address displayed when other Clients entered the BSC

Data Auto Configuration System. Start the BSC Data Auto Configuration System to

enter dynamic configuration mode, then exit normally, the BAM will be unlocked.

Caution:

Do not shut down the BSC Data Auto Configuration System by directly shutting down OMC Shell or 

OMC Local WS. The correct way should be: first shut down the BSC Data Auto Configuration System,

then shut down OMC Shell or OMC Local WS.

1.8.2 Troubleshooting about Dynamic Configuration

I. Timeout Processing

In the process of dynamic configuration, the abnormal network will lead to, data table

refreshing timeout, data table setting timeout, and dynamic configuration can not be

completed. An exit from the BSC Data Auto Configuration System will cause disparity

between the GMPU/BAM data and the BSC Data Auto Configuration System data.

Processing Method: 

Do not exit from the BSC Data Auto Configuration System! Before exiting the

interface, click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to secure a successful result

Page 48: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 48/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview

 

1-36

II. Abnormal Break Processing

During the process of dynamic configuration, a sudden break-down or power failure of 

a client terminal may result in an abnormal exit from the BSC Data Auto Configuration

System.

Processing Method: 

z  With abnormal situations that occurred before clicking <Start Dynamic

Configuration>, just restart the dynamic configuration.

z  With abnormal situations that occurred before saving the data successfully

configured for the first time, the configuration files of the BSC Data Auto

Configuration System have not been refreshed. Re-enter the BSC Data Auto

Configuration System and conduct the same operation as the previous one, then

return.z  With abnormal situations that occurred before saving the data successfully

configured for the second time (i.e., the inter-module broadcast), the

configuration files of the BSC Data Auto Configuration System have already

been refreshed. In the initial data configuration mode, refresh [Cell Description

Data Table], [Cell Module Information Table], [External Cell Description Table]

and [Frequency Hopping Data Table] and send them to all modules. If the

dynamic operation is to modify the mark of interface section or the parameter of 

voice optimization, set [Local Office Information Table] to all modules.

Note:

During dynamic configuration, all modules being configured data of the multi-module BSC must be in

service. Otherwise, timeout will occur to the dynamic configuration.

III. FTP Server Interrupted during dynamic configuration

Follow the following procedures when the configuration file of the BSC Data Auto

Configuration System has not been saved to BAM due to the interruption of FTP

Server during the whole process of dynamic configuration.

1) Do not exit the BSC Data Auto Configuration System and keep the BAM in

"locked" state to prevent other Clients enter dynamic data configuration mode to

modify the data. If the user exit the BSC Data Auto Configuration System under 

this case, other Clients may enter the editing state of the BSC Data Auto

Configuration System, modify and set the data, so that data inconsistency

between BAM and FAM may be incurred.

2)  After FTP Server is recovered, back up the data in FTP server by selecting

[Options/Backup Data to/FTP Server]. Note that the name of the backup data file

Page 49: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 49/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview

 

1-37

is AutoCfg.Dat. In this scenario, the BSC Data Auto Configuration System will

prompt the user to overwrite the file, as shown in Figure 1-47.

Figure 1-47 Prompt information when default data configuration file is overwritten

Select <Yes>, and then back up the data as AutoCfg.Dat. Then, the data obtained by

other Clients from FTP Server will be the data updated after the successful setting.

Page 50: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 50/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-1

Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

Modify the configuration data of BSC online without impacting system running.

2.1 Modify BIE Visibility

I. Function

1) Change the visibility of BIE online. The options of visibility include visibility and

invisibility. In general, the configuration of boards such as BIE and GLAP at BSC

Data Auto Configuration System adopts full configuration mode, i.e., the visibility

of the board not configured is set as invisible and cannot be deleted in the initial

data configuration. After the visibility of BIE is changed from invisible to visible,

more sites can be added onto BIE.

2) One dynamic configuration can modify the visibility of many BIEs in one module.

In the multi-module BSC, the transparent-transmission BIE cannot be set as

invisible.

II. Preparation

Be sure that the BIE whose visibility is to be modified has been configured in theinitial data configuration mode, for the dynamic configuration system does not support

adding or deleting of BIE.

III. Procedure

For example, follow the procedures below to set the BIEs numbered as 4 and 5 in

BM1 visible, and the ones numbered as 7, 8 and 9 invisible.

1) Select the [BSC/Modify BIE Board's Visibility], the interface will pop up as shown in

Figure 2-1.

Page 51: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 51/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-2

Figure 2-1 Select the module and the board contained in the module

Note:

1) The BIEs listed in Figure 2-1 are not connected to any site except for the transparent-transmission 

BIE. The transparent-transmission BIE cannot be set as invisible.

2) The “No.1” in “No.1 BIE board ” in the first row of the BIE selection box shown in Figure 2-1 indicates

the board number  of BIE.

3) Multiple BIEs can be selected at one time by pressing <Ctrl> or <Shift>.

2) In Figure 2-1, select “Module 1” in the [Select Module] drop-down list. In [Select

BIE Board] box, select “No.4 BIE Board, Invisible”, “No.5 BIE Board, Invisible”, “No.7

BIE Board, Visible”, “No.8 BIE Board, Visible”, and “No.9 BIE Board, Visible”. After all

steps are finished, the No.7, No.8 and No.9 BIE will be changed into invisible, the

No.4 and No.5 BIE will be changed into visible.

3) Click <Next> to enter the dynamic configuration interface. The commands will be

automatically written into [Command Line Parameter Table]. See Figure 2-2.

Page 52: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 52/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-3

Figure 2-2 Dynamic configuration BIE’s visibility

 After clicking button <Browse Command Table>, all the dynamic configuration

operation commands and the data table ID involved  in each dynamic configuration

operation can be seen, as shown in Figure 2-3.

Figure 2-3 Dynamically setting command and related data table of each command

If some operations have been found incorrect up to this point, click <Previous> to

select the module and BIE again.

4) Click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration to

GMPU.

IV. Verification

1) Check the status of the BIE through the BSC Maintenance System after 

modification.

2) Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run “BSC Data Management

System” to check the data table and the data of GMPU.

Page 53: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 53/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-4

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:

[Slot Description Table]

Note:

 All the data tables that concern the dynamic configuration are described in “Tables involved in BSC Data

Management System”, i.e., the data tables are the ones which will be refreshed and set to GMPU in this

dynamic configuration. The meaning of the reference data tables described in the following chapters is

the same as this, and will not give the details.

2.2 Modify LAPD Board's Visibility

I. Function

This function is used to display or conceal the GLAP already configured in initial data

configuration. After transforming GLAP from "invisible" into "visible", LAPD links can

be assigned to GLAP. One dynamic configuration can modify the visibility of multiple

GLAPs in one module.

II. Preparation

Make sure that the GALP whose visibility is to be modified has been configured at

BSC Data Auto Configuration System. Dynamic adding  or deleting of GALP is not

supported in the system.

III. Procedure

For example, set the GLAP numbered as 6 in BM1 invisible and the one numbered as

7 visible.

1) Select the [BSC/Modify LAPD Board's Visibility], the interface will pop up as shown

in Figure 2-4.

Note:

1). All LAPDs here refer to GLAP.

2) Multiple GLAPs can be selected at one time by pressing <Ctrl> or <Shift>.

Page 54: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 54/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-5

Figure 2-4 Select GLAP

Caution:

1). Figure 2-4 lists GLAPs that are not in service. There is no signaling link assigned to these LAPDs.

2) The “No.6” in “No.6 GLAP Board Visible” in the first row of the selection box shown in Figure 2-4

indicates the board number of GLAP. “Visible” indicates the visibility of the current GLAP.

2) In Figure 2-4, select “Module 1” in the [Select Module] drop-down list. In [Select

Lapd Board] box, select “No.6 GLAP Board, Visible” and “No.7 GLAP Board, Invisible”,

3) Click <Next> to enter the dynamic configuration interface. The commands will be

automatically written into [Command Line Parameter Table]. At this step, if some

operations are found incorrect, clicking <Previous> can re-select the module and

GLAP. And make sure that all settings are correct, and then click <Start Dynamic

Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration to GMPU as shown in

Figure 2-5.

Page 55: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 55/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-6

Figure 2-5 Command list during the process of dynamic configuration

IV. Verification

1) Check the status of the GLAP through BSC Maintenance System after modification.

2) Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run “BSC Data Management System” 

to check the data table and the data of GMPU.

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:

[Slot description table]

2.3 Modify BSC Interface Phase ID

I. Function

This function is used to modify the GSM protocol standard adopted by all interfaces ,

including A interface version, Abis interface version and Um interface version.

II. Preparation

None.

III. Procedure 

For example, modify Abis interface version as GSM_Phase_2.

Page 56: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 56/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-7

1) Select the [BSC/Modify BSC Interface Phase Flag], the interface will pop up as

shown in Figure 2-6.

Figure 2-6 Interface for the configuration of interface property

2) Modify Abis interface version as “GSM_Phase_2” in [Interface Property], then click

<Next> to enter the dynamic configuration interface as shown in Figure 2-7.

Figure 2-7 Command list during the process of dynamic configuration

3) Click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration of the

phase flag of the BSC interface.

IV. Verification

Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run “BSC Data Management System” to

check the data table.

Select the [Operations/View Host Data…] to check the host data to see whether the

related data has been set to every module.

Page 57: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 57/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-8

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:

[Local office information table]

2.4 Modify Voice Optimization Parameter 

I. Function

This function is used to modify the BSC voice encoding and decoding method.

“Normal Encode/Decode” and “Support TFO” are supported in BSC. Different

methods provide different conversation quality.

II. Preparation

None.

III. Procedure

1) Select the [BSC/Modify Voice Optimization Parameter], the interface will pop up as

shown in Figure 2-8.

Figure 2-8 Interface of voice code optimization

2) Select “Normal Encode/Decode” in the [Voice Encode/Decode Optimization] drop-

down list, then click <Next> to enter the dynamic configuration interface as shown in

Figure 2-9.

Page 58: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 58/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-9

Figure 2-9 Command list during the process of dynamic configuration

3) Click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration of 

voice Optimization Parameter.

IV. Verification

Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run “BSC Data Management System” to

check the data table.

Select the [Local-office/Local Office Information Table] to check the [Local office

information table] and select the [Operations/View Host Data…] to check the host

data to see whether the related data has been set to every module.

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:

[Local office information table]

2.5 Modify BSC BIE CRC4 Check

I. Function

This function is used to modify BSC BIE CRC4 check. The value of all BSC BIEs that

have been configured in initial data configuration work mode can be modified in one

dynamic operation.

Page 59: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 59/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-10

II. Preparation

None.

III. Procedure

For example, change BSC BIE CRC4 check of BSC BIE whose group No. is 0 in

module 1 into 110011, change BSC BIE CRC4 check of BSC BIE whose group No. is

2 in module 2 into 001100.

1) Select the [BSC/Modify BSC BIE CRC4 Check], the interface will pop up as shown

in Figure 2-10.

Figure 2-10 Modify CRC4

First select the BIE whose group No. is 0 in module 1 in left box in Figure 2-10, then

select port 0, port 1, port 4, port 5 with mouse in right box, which represents the value

of selected BIE is 110011.

Select the BIE whose group No. is 2 in module 2 in left box in Figure 2-10, then select

port 2, port 3 with mouse in right box, which represents the value of selected BIE is

001100.

2) After all the BSC BIE CRC4 check configuration is completed, click <Next> shownin Figure 2-10. In the wizard interface, click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to

implement the dynamic configuration of BSC BIE CRC4 check.

IV. Verification

Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run “BSC Data Management System” to

check the data table.

Check the following data tables and select the [Operations/View Host Data…] to

check the host data to see whether the related data has been correctly modified.

Page 60: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 60/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-11

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:

[BSC BIE active/stby. group table], [BSC BIE description table].

2.6 Configure Monitor Timeslot

I. Function

This function is used to configure monitor timeslot. User can configure monitor 

timeslot by two methods: auto calculate or manual mode. If the site to be configured

monitor timeslot is manual mode, user can only configure by manual mode, on theother hand, user can only configure by auto calculate.

II. Preparation

None.

III. Procedure of manual mode

1) Select the [BSC/Configure Monitor Timeslot], the interface will pop up as shown in

Figure 2-11.

Figure 2-11 Select BIE Board (Configure Monitor Timeslot by manual mode)

Note:

Only the BIE that has configured sites can be selected in Figure 2-11. Otherwise the button <Next> will

be unusable.

Page 61: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 61/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-12

2) After BIE board is selected, click <Next> in Figure 2-11, the interface will pop up as

shown in Figure 2-12.

Figure 2-12 Select BIE Port (Configure Monitor Timeslot by manual mode)

Select BIE port has connected sites that need configure monitor timeslot. If the

selected BIE port connects no site or site is not manual mode, the button <Next> will

be unusable.

Note:

User can not click <Site Monitor Timeslot> to add monitor timeslot when configure monitor timeslot by

manual mode, otherwise the button <Next> will be unusable. Here, the button <Site Monitor Timeslot> is

used to delete the existing monitor timeslot configured by auto calculate for in case.

3) After BIE port is selected, click <Next> shown in Figure 2-12, the interface will pop

up as shown in Figure 2-13.

Figure 2-13 Configure Monitor Timeslot (Configure Monitor Timeslot by manual mode)

Page 62: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 62/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-13

Select the site which need configure monitor timeslot, then configure site trunk mode

description, semi-permanent connection and BIE port property etc. step by step. If 

relay mode of selected BIE is full rate ring topology, 6 E1 port half rate topology or 

half rate ring topology, BSC BIE semi-permanent connection must be configured atthe same time.

Note:

1) If the selected site has been configured idle timeslots in initial data configuration work mode, the

button <Idle Timeslot> will be usable, the idle timeslot of the selected site can be adjusted.

2) All the information must be input manually and must assure its correctness.

4) After all the monitor timeslot information configuration is completed, click <Next>

shown in Figure 2-13. In the wizard interface, click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to

implement the dynamic configuration of monitor timeslot.

IV. Procedure of auto calculate mode

1) Select the [BSC/Configure Monitor Timeslot], the interface will pop up as shown in

Figure 2-14.

Figure 2-14 Select BIE Board (Configure Monitor Timeslot by auto calculate mode)

Note:

Only the BIE that has configured sites can be selected in Figure 2-14. Otherwise the button <Next> will

be unusable.

Page 63: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 63/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-14

2) After BIE board is selected, click the button <Next> in Figure 2-14, the interface will

pop up as shown in Figure 2-15.

Figure 2-15 Select BIE Port (Configure Monitor Timeslot by auto calculate mode)

Select the site to be configured monitor timeslot in Figure 2-15.

3)  After site is selected, click the button <Site Monitor Timeslot> in Figure 2-15, the

interface will pop up as shown in Figure 2-16.

Figure 2-16 Configure Monitor Timeslot (by auto calculate mode)

In Figure 2-16, user can first select one monitor timeslot record, then click <Delete> to

delete it; Or user can first select one monitor timeslot record, then modify it; And user 

can click <Add> to add a monitor timeslot record with default value. When modify the

default value of “Site BIE Port No. Connects Monitor Device” and “Abis Timeslot No.

Connects Monitor Device”, user needs only to click the form and select wanted value

Page 64: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 64/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-15

from the list. When modify the “End Channel No.”, user needs to double click the form

and the interface as shown in Figure 2-17 will pop up.

Figure 2-17 Set End Channel No. (by auto calculate mode)

In Figure 2-17, after user select “End Equipment Type”, “BIE port No.” and “BIE

Timeslot No.”, the system will auto calculate “End Channel No.”. If the user want to

input the value of “End Channel No.” directly, the checkbox “User Input” should be

selected first. Then the edit box will be valid and user can input the wanted value. To

complete configure “End Channel No.”, click <OK> and return to Figure 2-16.

4)  After all the monitor timeslot information configuration is completed, click <Next>

as shown in Figure 2-15. In the wizard interface, click <Start Dynamic

Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration of monitor timeslot.

V. Verification

Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run “BSC Data Management System” to

check the data table.

Check the following data tables and select the [Operations/View Host Data…] to

check the host data to see whether the related data has been correctly modified.

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:

[Semi-permanent connection table], [site BIE trunk mode description table], [site BIE configuration table],

[signaling channel link table], [BSC BIE description table], [BSC BIE active/stby. Group table], [BSC BIE

semi-permanent connection table], [Trunk circuit table]

Page 65: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 65/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-16

2.7 Modify Abis Bypass Switch

I. Function

This function is used to modify Abis bypass switch. For example, make a BIE port

support or not support Abis bypass.

II. Preparation

None.

III. Procedure

1) Select the [BSC/Modify Abis Bypass Switch], the interface will pop up as shown in

Figure 2-18.

Figure 2-18 Select BIE Board (Modify Abis Bypass Switch)

Note:

Only the BIE that has configured sites can be selected in Figure 2-18. Otherwise the button <Next> will

be unusable.

2) After BIE board is selected, click <Next> in Figure 2-18, the interface will pop up as

shown in Figure 2-19.

Page 66: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 66/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-17

Figure 2-19 Modify Bypass Switch (Modify Abis Bypass Switch)

First select BIE port in Figure 2-19, then modify the value of Abis bypass switch with

clicking “Abis Bypass Switch” checkbox.

Note:

1) If the selected BIE port connects no site, the “Abis Bypass Switch” checkbox and the button <Next>

will be unusable.

2) Only one BIE port’s Abis bypass switch can be modified in one dynamic operation.

3) Click <Next> in Figure 2-19, the interface will pop up as shown in Figure 2-20.

Figure 2-20  Adjust Manually (Modify Abis Bypass Switch)

In Figure 2-20, all sites on the main chain of the newly-added sites are listed. All TRX

properties (e.g., Abis TS No., Abis sub-TS No. and trunk circuit No., etc.), RSL and

OML properties of all sites must be input manually for the manual adjustment of 

Page 67: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 67/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-18

timeslots. If sites cascading is involved, site trunk mode and BIE port property must

also be configured. Detail information on it please refer to adding site of book

“dynamic configuration (BTS)”.

Note:

Figure 2-20 will not appeared only that the selected BIE port is manual mode.

4) After all the configuration is completed, click <Next> shown in Figure 2-13 (or in

Figure 2-12 if the selected BIE port is not manual mode). In the wizard interface, click

<Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration of Abis

bypass switch.

IV. Verification

Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run “BSC Data Management System” to

check the data table.

Check the following data tables and select the [Operations/View Host Data…] to

check the host data to see whether the related data has been correctly modified.

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:

[Radio channel configuration table], [BSC BIE description table], [site BIE trunk mode description table],

[site BIE configuration table], [signaling channel link table], [site description table], [BSC BIE semi-

permanent connection table], [trunk circuit table], [BSC BIE active/stby. group table]

2.8 Dynamic Configuration without CommandsSome data table can be easily maintained with this function, including maintenance of 

trunk circuits, BTS software index, flow control, common parameters, semi-permanent

connection, alarm parameters, GMEM IP address configuration, board software

loading, timer data and TMU auto activation info etc.

Page 68: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 68/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-19

2.8.1 Trunk Circuits

I. Function

This function is used to modify the attributes of trunk circuits on FTC, including the

available state of circuits, and initial CIC, etc.

II. Preparation

1) Be sure that the FTC to be modified has been configured in the initial data

configuration at the BSC Data Auto Configuration System. To meet the demand of 

capacity expansion, the configuration of boards such as FTC, BIE and GLAP in BSC

adopts full configuration, and the FTC not in service cannot be deleted in the initial

data configuration.

2) To dynamically modify the circuit properties on FTC such as CIC and circuit type,

make sure that “Auto Calculation” in “A-interface CIC Calculation Mode” has not been

selected. Click [Local Office Information] tab in “BSC Data Auto Configuration

System” of  the initial data configuration interface, and then in the tab page click

<Advanced>. You now enter a [Local Data Default Config] interface, where “Auto

Calculation” in “A-interface CIC Calculation Mode” can be found by clicking [A-

Interface Timeslot Occupancy] tab page.). See Figure 2-21.

Figure 2-21  [Local Data Default Config] tab page in initial data configuration

If “Auto Calculation” in “A-interface CIC Calculation Mode” is selected, circuit

properties of any FTC in all the BMs cannot be modified except available state.

Page 69: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 69/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-20

III. Procedure 

For example, to connect BSC with MSC, follow the following procedures to modify the

CIC value of No.72 FTC in BM1 as (31, 65535, 32, 33,… 62).

1) Select the [BSC/Dynamic Configuration without Command/Trunk Circuit], the

interface will pop up as shown in Figure 2-22. 

Figure 2-22 FTC trunk circuit parameters setting

2) Click <Trunk Circuit> in Figure 2-22, then [Select Card] interface listing all FTCs

will pop up. See Figure 2-23.

Figure 2-23 [Select Card] interface listing all FTCs

3) In the wizard interface, select “Module 1” in the [Select the Module Which Card

Lies in] drop-down list then select “72 FTC” in [All Cards in Current Module]. Click

Page 70: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 70/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-21

<Card Property> or double click the selected FTC, and the [Set FTC Board Property]

interface will pop up. See Figure 2-24.

Figure 2-24 FTC Property Setting

 As shown in Figure 2-24, modify the CIC value as (31, 65535, 32, 33, … 62) in the

[Circuit Property] tab page and the "Start CIC No." as 31 in the [Advanced] tab page.

Click <OK> to confirm the settings and return to the interface shown in Figure 2-23.

Then click <OK> to complete the settings.

Note:

1) “Auto-Calculate Circuit Property” in the [Circuit Property] tab page should not be selected if you want

to manually input CIC values in the tab page [Circuit Property]. Otherwise, the text in [Circuit Property]

cannot be edited.

2) The FTC circuit properties will be calculated automatically if the “Auto-Calculate Circuit Property” is

selected. System calculates FTC circuit properties according to  A interface timeslot occupancy,

(Whether TS 0, 1, 16 and 31 occupy CIC. If not, whether these TSs should be reserved, etc.),

FTC visibility and circuit availability. For calculation details, refer to Initial data configuration

part. But the value for “Start CIC No.” must be input. 

3) All values for circuit properties must be input manually if the “Auto-Calculate Circuit Property” is not

selected. If a TS will not be assigned with any CIC, set the CIC value of this TS as 65535 and no other 

values are allowed to be input. The “Start CIC No.” should also be manually input as the minimal

value among the 32 CICs. 

4) It must be ensured that “Start CIC No.” of all FTCs are different.

5) The dynamic adding of SS7 is not supported.

4) Repeat Step2) and Step3) to complete the attributes modification of all FTCs.

Page 71: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 71/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-22

5) Click <Next> shown in Figure 2-22 to start the dynamic configuration. In the

dynamic configuration interface, click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the

dynamic configuration of modifying trunk circuit properties.

IV. Verification

Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run “BSC Data Management System” to

check the data table.

Check the following data tables and select the [Operations/View Host Data…] to

check the host data to see whether the related data has been correctly modified.

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:

[Trunk circuit table], [CIC module table].

2.8.2 BTS Software Index

I. Function

This function is used to dynamically configure BTS software index for BTS software

load.

II. Preparation

None.

III. Procedure

For example, to dynamically add BTS 3002C IOMU software index.

1) Select the [BSC/Dynamic Configuration without Command /BTS Software Index],

the interface will pop up as shown in Figure 2-25.

Page 72: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 72/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-23

Figure 2-25 BTS software index parameters setting

2) Click <BTS Software Index>, [BTS Software Configuration] listing all configured

BTS software indexes will pop up as shown in Figure 2-26.

Figure 2-26 BTS Software Configuration

3) Click <Add> shown in Figure 2-26 to add 3002C IOMU index. [Add Configuration

Item] interface will pop up, as shown in Figure 2-27.

Page 73: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 73/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-24

Figure 2-27 Configuration Item adding

4) Select IOMU_MAIN in the [Software Serial No.] drop-down list box and input

software names and version No. in corresponding fields. Then click <OK> to

finish the adding of 3002C IOMU software index.

Note:

The “Software Version Index No.” as shown in Figure 2-26 is generated by the system, and user needs

not to input..

5)  After all the software indexes configuration is completed, click <Next> shown in

Figure 2-25. In the wizard interface, click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to

implement the dynamic configuration of adding 3002C IOMU software index to

GMPU.

IV. Verification

1) Run Site Maintenance System and load software to see whether the loading is

successful.

2) Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run “BSC Data Management System”

to check the [Site/Site Software Configuration Table]

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:

[Site Software Configuration Table].

Page 74: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 74/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-25

2.8.3 Flow Control

I. Function

This function is used to dynamically configure the flow control parameters.

II. Preparation

None.

III. Procedure

For example, modify the flow control parameter “Abis Flow Control Counter T1”.

1) Select the [BSC/Dynamic Configuration without Command/Flow Control], theinterface will pop up as shown in Figure 2-28.

Figure 2-28 Flow control parameters setting

2) Click <Flow Control> as shown in Figure 2-28, the password verification window

will pop up. The flow control parameters will be listed in the list box if the password is

correct, See Figure 2-29.

Page 75: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 75/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-26

Figure 2-29 Flow control parameters setting

Modify the value of “Abis Flow Control Counter T1” and click <OK>.

3) Click <Next> shown in Figure 2-28. In the wizard interface, click <Start Dynamic

Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration of configuring flow control

parameters to GMPU.

IV. Verification

Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run “BSC Data Management System” to

check the [Configuration/Flow Control Parameter Table] and [Cell/Cell Call Control

Table].

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:

[Flow Control Parameter Table].

2.8.4 Common Parameter 

I. Function

This function is used to dynamically configure common parameters, including [Public

Parameter Table], [Module Parameter Table], [Common Max. Tuple Number Table],

[Module Maximum Tuple Table] and [Software Parameter Table].

Page 76: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 76/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-27

II. Preparation

None.

III. Procedure

For example, modify the “Call Parameter 1” in [Software Parameter Table] as FFFD.

1) Select the [BSC/Dynamic Configuration without Command/Common Parameter],

the interface will pop up as shown in Figure 2-30.

Figure 2-30 Common parameter setting

2) Click <Common Parameter> as shown in  Figure 2-30, the [Common Parameter 

Tables] interface will pop up, as shown in Figure 2-31.

Figure 2-31 Common parameter tables setting

Page 77: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 77/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-28

Select the tab page “Software Parameter Table” in Figure 2-31 and modify the “Call

Parameter 1” as “FFFD”. Click <OK> to complete the modification of all the common

parameters. 

3) Click <Next> shown in Figure 2-30. In the wizard interface, click <Start Dynamic

Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration of configuring common

parameters to GMPU.

IV. Verification

Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run “BSC Data Management System” to

check the data table.

Check the following data tables and select the [Operations/View Host Data…] to

check the host data to see whether the related data has been correctly modified.

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:

[Cell Call Control Table], [Module Parameter Table], [Common Max. Tuple number Table], [Module

Maximum Tuple Table], [Software Parameter Table].

Note:

 After modifying the [Software Parameter Table], please check the data of all the BSC modules to see

whether the related data has been set to every module. While other data tables, to see whether the DBF

has been refreshed.

2.8.5 Semi-Permanent Connection

I. Function

This function is used to dynamically configure semi-permanent connection

parameters.

II. Preparation

None.

Page 78: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 78/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-29

III. Procedure

1) Select the [BSC/Dynamic Configuration without Command/Semi-Permanent

Connection], the interface will pop up as shown in Figure 2-32.

Figure 2-32 Semi-permanent connection parameters setting

2) Click <Semi-Permanent Connection> shown in Figure 2-32, the [Semi-Permanent

Connection Table] interface will pop up as shown in Figure 2-33.

Figure 2-33 Semi-permanent connection table setting

To add, modify and delete a record by pressing <Add>, <Modify> and <Delete>

respectively. Click <OK > to complete the configuration of semi-permanent connection.

3) Click <Next> shown in Figure 2-32. In the wizard interface, click <Start Dynamic

Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration to GMPU.

Page 79: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 79/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-30

IV. Verification

Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run "BSC Data Management System” to

check the [Configuration/Semi-permanent Connection Table].

Check the following data table and select the [Operations/View Host Data…] to check

the host data to see whether the related data has been correctly modified.

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:

[Semi-permanent Connection Table].

2.8.6 Alarm Parameter 

I. Function

This function is used to dynamically configure alarm parameters, including BSC alarm

parameters, BSC alarm environment variables, BTS alarm parameters, BTS alarm

environment variables, AM alarm screening table, BM alarm screening table, alarm

information parameters and AM alarm environment variables.

II. Preparation

None.

III. Procedure

For example, to dynamically configure BSC alarm parameters.

1) Select the [BSC/Dynamic Configuration without Command/Alarm/BSC Alarm

Information Configuration], the interface will pop up as shown in Figure 2-34.

Page 80: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 80/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-31

Figure 2-34 BSC Alarm Information Configuration

2) Click <BSC Alarm Information Configuration> shown in Figure 2-34, the

password verification window will pop up as shown in Figure 2-35.

Figure 2-35 Password verification

 After inputting correct password, [Alarm Parameter table] will pop up, as shown in

Figure 2-36. In this interface, alarm parameters will be listed.

Figure 2-36  Alarm parameter table for BSC alarm information configuration

Page 81: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 81/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-32

Note:

 All the alarm parameters are listed in the common interface shown in Figure 2-36, so only one set of 

parameters (e.g., AM alarm screening, or BM alarm screening etc.) can be operated by one dynamic

configuration.

3)  After all necessary data operations, click <OK> shown in Figure 2-36 to complete

BSC alarm parameter configuration. Click <Next> shown in Figure 2-34 to start

dynamic configuration. In the wizard interface, click <Start Dynamic

Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration to GMPU.

IV. Verification

Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run “BSC Data Management System” to

check the data table.

Check the related data tables and select the [Operations/View Host Data…] to check

the host data to see whether the related data has been correctly modified.

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:

[Alarm Parameter Configuration Table], [Alarm Environment Variable Table], [BTS Alarm InformationConfiguration Table], [BTS Alarm Environment Variable Table], [Alarm Information Parameter Table],

[BM Alarm Screening Table], [AM Alarm Screening Table], [AM Alarm Environment Variable Table].

2.8.7 GMEM Configuration

I. Function

This function is used to dynamically configure GMEM IP. One dynamic configuration

can modify the attributes of all the GMEMs installed in BM.

II. Preparation

Be sure that GMEM information has been configured in the initial data configuration

mode at the BSC Data Auto Configuration System. Dynamic adding of GMEM is not

supported in the system.

Page 82: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 82/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-33

III. Procedure

For example, to add the IP information of GMEM numbered as 5 in BM1.

1) Select the [BSC/Dynamic Configuration without Command/Alarm/GMEMConfiguration], the interface will pop up as shown in Figure 2-37.

Figure 2-37 GMEM Configuration

2) Click <GMEM Configuration> shown in Figure 2-37, The [Select Card] interface

listing all the installed GMEMs will pop up. See Figure 2-38.

Figure 2-38 List of all the installed GMEMs

In the wizard interface, select “Module 1” in the [Select the Module Which Card Lies in]

drop-down list then select the GMEM whose IP address is to be modified in [All Cards

in Current Module]. Click <Card Property> or double click the selected GMEM, and

the [Set GMEM Board Property] interface will pop up. See Figure 2-39.

Page 83: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 83/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-34

Figure 2-39 GMEM IP information

3) Click <Add> to add a GMEM IP configuration item, then click <OK> to return to the

interface shown in Figure 2-38 and then click <OK> to complete the attributes

modification of the GMEM.

4) Repeat Step2) and Step3) to complete the attributes modification of all GMEMs.

5) Click <Next> shown in Figure 2-37 to start the dynamic configuration. In the

dynamic configuration interface, click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the

dynamic configuration to GMPU.

IV. Verification

Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run “BSC Data Management System”.

Check the following data tables and select the [Operations/View Host Data…] to

check the host data to see whether the related data has been correctly modified.

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:

[GMEM Configuration Table].

Page 84: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 84/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-35

2.8.8 Board Software Loading

I. Function

This function is used to configure loading information of board software, e.g. to

configure GMEM loading information.

II. Preparation

None.

III. Procedure

1) Select the [BSC/Dynamic Configuration without Command/Board Software

Loading], the interface will pop up as shown in Figure 2-40.

Figure 2-40 Board software loading

2) Click <Board Software Loading> in the interface shown in Figure 2-40, and the

[Board Software Loading Table] interface will pop up. See Figure 2-41.

Page 85: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 85/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-36

Figure 2-41 Board Software Loading Table

To add, modify or delete a record via <Add>, <Modify> and <Delete> respectively.

Click <OK> to complete the configuration of board software loading information, and

return to the interface shown in Figure 2-40.

3) Click <Next> shown in Figure 2-40 and start the dynamic configuration. In the

wizard interface, click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic

configuration to GMPU.

IV. Verification

Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run “BSC Data Management System”.

Check the following data tables and select the [Operations/View Host Data…] to

check the host data to see whether the related data has been correctly modified.

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:

[Board Software Loading Table].

2.8.9 Timer Data

I. Function

This function is used to dynamically configure timer data parameters.

Page 86: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 86/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-37

II. Preparation

None.

III. Procedure

1) Select the [BSC/Dynamic Configuration without Command/Timer Data], the

interface will pop up as shown in Figure 2-42.

Figure 2-42 Timer Data

2) Click <Timer Data> in the interface shown in Figure 2-42, and the [Timer data]

interface will pop up. See Figure 2-43.

Figure 2-43 Timer Data Table

 After all necessary data operations, click <OK> shown in Figure 2-43 to complete

timer data configuration, and return to the interface shown in Figure 2-42.

Page 87: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 87/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-38

3) Click <Next> shown in Figure 2-42 and start the dynamic configuration. In the

wizard interface, click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic

configuration to timer data.

IV. Verification

Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run “BSC Data Management System”.

Check the following data tables and select the [Operations/View Host Data…] to

check the host data to see whether the related data has been correctly modified.

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:

[Timer Table].

2.8.10 TMU Auto Activation Info

I. Function

This function is used to dynamically configure TMU auto activation info. System will

change one kind of selected parameter of all selected sites into same value.

II. Preparation

None.

III. Procedure

1) Select the [BSC/Dynamic Configuration without Command/TMU Auto Activation

Info], the interface will pop up as shown in Figure 2-44.

Page 88: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 88/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-39

Figure 2-44 Select Site

2) Select sites that need configure TMU auto activation info to activate <Next> in

Figure 2-44. Then click <Next> in Figure 2-44 to enter the interface as shown in

Figure 2-45.

Figure 2-45 Select Site Property

Note:

Only TMU auto activation info parameters (e.g. auto activation switch, TMU major version number, TMU

minor version number and version time) can be selected in Figure 2-45. Otherwise a message will be

shown in Figure 2-46.

Page 89: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 89/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-40

Figure 2-46 Error message if selected parameters is not related to TMU auto activation info

3) Then click <Next> in Figure 2-45 to enter the interface as shown in Figure 2-47.

Figure 2-47 Modify Site Property

Click <Modify Site Property> in Figure 2-47 to modify property of selected TMU auto

activation info. The interface is shown in Figure 2-48.

Figure 2-48 Modify TMU Auto Activation Info

Page 90: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 90/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-41

Note:

Only selected parameters can be edited in Figure 2-48.

 After all necessary data operations, click <OK> shown in Figure 2-48 to complete

TMU auto activation info configuration, and return to the interface shown in

Figure 2-47.

4) Then click <Next> in Figure 2-47 to enter the interface as shown in Figure 2-49.

Click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration to TMU

auto activation info.

Figure 2-49 Dynamic configuration

IV. Verification

Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run “BSC Data Management System”.

Check the following data tables and select the [Operations/View Host Data…] to

check the host data to see whether the related data has been correctly modified.

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:

[Site Description Table].

Page 91: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 91/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-42

2.9 Import Network Parameters

I. Function

This function is used to import network parameters, including: frequencies of cells,

external cells and adjacent relationship of cells. The network parameters information

that will be imported is saved in external text files which can only be edited by

Microsoft Excel.

II. Preparation

None.

III. Procedure

1) Select the [BSC/Import Network Parameters], the interface will pop up as shown in

Figure 2-50.

Figure 2-50 Select imported text file (Import Network Parameters)

2) Select text that is used to import operation, then click <Open> in Figure 2-50 to

enter the interface as shown in Figure 2-51. Click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to

implement the dynamic configuration to importing network parameters.

Page 92: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 92/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-43

Figure 2-51 Dynamic Configuration (Import Network Parameters)

Note:

1) System will perform different dynamic configuration (frequencies of cells import, external cells import

or adjacent relationship of cells import according to different type of the selected text file.

2) Error information will be given if the selected text file contains incorrect information.

IV. Verification

Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run “BSC Data Management System”.

Check the following data tables and select the [Operations/View Host Data…] to

check the host data to see whether the related data has been correctly modified.

2.10 Export Network Parameters

I. Function

This function is used to export network parameters, including frequencies of cells,

external cells and adjacent relationship of cells. The network parameters information

that has been exported is saved in external text files which can only be edited by

Microsoft Excel.

II. Preparation

None.

Page 93: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 93/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-44

III. Procedure

1) Select the [BSC/export Network Parameters], the interface will pop up as shown in

Figure 2-52.

Figure 2-52 Export Network Parameters

First select export network parameter type (export frequencies of cells, export

external cells or export adjacent relationship of cells), then select cells or external

cells that want to perform exporting in Figure 2-52, the button <Export Parameter> willbe usable.

2) Click <Export Parameter> in Figure 2-52 to enter the interface as shown in

Figure 2-53.

Figure 2-53 Select Output File Name (Export Network Parameters)

Page 94: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 94/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-45

First input file name, then click <Save> in Figure 2-53, Information represents that

exporting operation is end will be shown in Figure 2-54.

Figure 2-54 Export Successfully

3) After exporting all types of network parameters, click <Exit> in Figure 2-52 to

complete exporting operation.

IV. Verification

Check the correctness of all the exported text files.

Note:

No modification of any data table is related to this operation.

2.11 Modify Reserved Parameters

I. Function

The parameters are reserved for functions that will be developed later or software

patch. There are different reserved parameters in numbers for BM, site, cell or TRX

that have been configured, not configured BM, site, cell or TRX has no reserved

parameters. This operation is to modify these exist reserved parameters, can not to

add or delete.

II. Preparation

None.

III. Procedure

1) Select the [BSC/Modify Reserved Parameters], if select Module, Site or Cell in the

submenu, the interface will pop up as shown in Figure 2-55.

Page 95: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 95/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-46

Figure 2-55 select object to be modified(Module, Site or Cell)

If select TRX in the submenu, the interface will pop up as shown in Figure 2-56.

Figure 2-56 select object to be modified(Module, Site or Cell)

 According to the reserved parameters that will be modified, select module, site, cell or 

TRX in Figure 2-55 or Figure 2-56, then the button <Next> will be usable.

2) Click <Next> in Figure 2-55 or Figure 2-56, the interface will pop up as shown in

Figure 2-57

Page 96: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 96/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-47

Figure 2-57 reselect object to be modified(Module, Site, Cell or TRX)

In Figure 2-57, user can not only select one object from the selected module, site, cell

or TRX in previous step to modify, but also select several or all objects to modify

together.

3) Then click <Modify Reserved Parameters> in Figure 2-57, the interface will pop up

as shown in Figure 2-58, there will be some litter different in the interface according touser select module, site, cell or TRX in first step.

Figure 2-58 modify reserved parameters

Page 97: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 97/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data

 

2-48

In Figure 2-58, if user want to modify one parameter a time, click the cell that the

parameter located in and input directly. If user want to modify several parameters in

one column a time, follow the steps: First, modify any one parameter of them. Second,

right click the parameter. Third, select “Current col from current row” or “Current col.from begin”

4) After modify all reserved parameters, click <Next> as shown in Figure 2-57 and

start the dynamic configuration. In the wizard interface, click <Start Dynamic

Configuration> to implement modify reserved parameters operation.

IV. Verification

Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run “BSC Data Management System”.

Check the following data tables and select the [Operations/View Host Data…] tocheck the host data to see whether the related data has been correctly modified.

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:

[BM Reserved Parameter Table], [Site Reserved Parameter Table], [Cell Reserved Parameter Table],

[TRX Reserved Parameter Table].

Page 98: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 98/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-1

Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

This chapter introduces operations to BTS data. Including: adding/deleting site,

adding/deleting TRX, adding/deleting BTS board, modify site's extended parameter,

modify site's output property, start-up traffic statistic task re-register.

3.1 Add a Site

I. Function

This function is used to add a site online. There is no need to reset BSC.

Caution:

1) Under chain and tree networking, if the new site fails to normally operate, it is recommended that sites

on the chain where this site can be located be reset successively from the one at the uppermost level. In

addition, BIE can also be reset. Check the correctness of the data configuration.

2) After successfully adding a site, re-register the traffic statistics tasks of this site by selecting the

[BTS/Startup Traffic Stat. Task Re-register].

3) If the new site is the first added site of BIE port , and the newly added site can not work, needs to

reset the BIE.

II. Preparation

1) Make sure that there are idle E1 ports on BIE.

2) Add a site involves most of the BSC data. Before dynamic configuration, do checkthe data configuration carefully to avoid data inconsistency or data error.

3) Only one site can be added to one BIE port by one dynamic configuration

operation. If the TRX of the new site is distributed over multiple chains, Add TRX or 

 Add Cell operation should be performed after the site is successfully added.

4) Dynamic adding or deleting of subsidiary chain is not supported in the system.

Usually configuration of multi-chain should have been completed in the initial

configuration.

Page 99: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 99/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-2

5) The “adding a cell” operation has been performed during the process of the “Add a

Site” operation. Select the [Cell/ Modify Cell Handover Parameter] to implement

"Modify Cell Handover Parameter" operation to configure cell adjacency relationship

after the dynamic adding of site succeeds.

III. Procedure

For example, add Site30, TRX0, TRX3, TRX5, TRX8, TRX18, TRX21 and TRX24 in

BM1 for two cells. Cell1 includes TRX0, TRX5, TRX18 and TRX24 and Cell2 includes

TRX3, TRX8 and TRX21. Cell1 and Cell2 are bi-directionally adjacent. No TS manual

adjustment is required for the new site. And the new site is connected to port0 of BIE0,

with trunk mode as 12:1.

1) Select the [BTS/Add a Site], the [Add a Site] interface will pop up. Select the

module of the BTS and the BIE in it as shown in Figure 3-1.

Figure 3-1 Selecting the board and the module containing the board in [Add a Site]

2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 3-2.

Figure 3-2  Add a site

Page 100: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 100/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-3

Caution:

The trunk mode can not be modified unless no sites have been connected to the any port of BIE board.

3) Select Port [0] the BIE port connected to the BTS, and Site0 the site of upper level

to add site. Then click <Add Site> to enter the interface shown in Figure 3-3.

Figure 3-3  Add site

Having chosen the site type BTS 30, BIE port of upper level, click <OK> to close the

window of "Add site". The interface will pop up, as shown in Figure 3-4 will pop up.

Figure 3-4 Select mode

Click <No> to complete the “Adding Site”.

Caution:

1) In Figure 3-4, if click <Yes>, A [Manual Mode] check box will appear in the [Add a Site] interface as

shown in Figure 3-15, in which “Site2” will also appear. Select this parameter and for more details,

please refer the following steps, i.e., Step13) ~ Step19).

2) After a site is added, the button <Add Site>, the [Trunk Mode] list box and all the BIE ports in

Figure 3-2 can not be edited to ensure that one dynamic operation can only add one site to one BIE port.

Page 101: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 101/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-4

In Figure 3-2, select <Site Ports Table> and click <OK>. A new interface will appear 

as shown in Figure 3-5.

Figure 3-5 Configuration of cascading relations between sites

Caution:

1) <Modify BIE Port and Site Connection> is usable, only if the selected BIE port is the one that the

subsidiary chain is connected to.

2) The connection between the upper level site and the lower site with inlet port No. as 0 cannot be

deleted, and the port with lower site inlet port number as 0 cannot be modified.

Click <OK> to return to the [Add Site] interface. Then click <OK> and a [Confirm]

interface will pop up. If to adjust BIE port manually, please click <Yes> in the [Confirm]

interface and go to Step 13.

4) In Figure 3-2, click <Next>, the interface will appear as shown in Figure 3-6.

Page 102: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 102/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-5

Figure 3-6  Add TRX

Click <Add TRX> to add No.0, 3, 5, 8, 18, 21 and 24 TRX.

5) After adding TRX, click <Next>, the interface will appear as shown in Figure 3-7.

Figure 3-7  Adding cell in [Add a Site]

6) If the newly added TRXs are borne by multiple cabinets, click <Modify Site Device’sProperty> shown in Figure 3-7 to configure the intra-site cascading relationship and

delete the excessive boards in the site. See Figure 3-8.

Page 103: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 103/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-6

Figure 3-8 BTS equipment property configuration

Select the rack in the [Current Rack] drop-down list box, delete the excessive boards,

and double click the CDU to configure antenna feeder property. Then click <BTS

Property> to configure site property.

Click <Inter-Site Link> shown in Figure 3-8 to configure the intra-site cascading. See

Figure 3-9.

Figure 3-9 Site internal connections configuration

Configure the site internal connections according to the actual demand. The relations

between port No. and TRX are shown in Table 3-1.

Page 104: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 104/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-7

Table 3-1 Relationship between port No. and TRX

Cabinet group No. Port No. No. of TRX corresponding to BTS30No. of TRX corresponding to

BTS312

0 0~7 0~17 0~23

1 8~11 18~35 24~47

2 12~15 36~53 48~71

7) Click <Add Cell> as shown in Figure 3-7 to add 2 cells. See Figure 3-10.

Figure 3-10  Add cell

Note:

1) The “Cell Name” cannot be edited when the value of [Cell Number] exceeds 1 or the “Name cell by

site’s name” is selected.

2) If the “Name cell by site’s name” is selected, the cell name format is “Site name-cell No.”, e.g., the 2

cells added in this example should be named as “Site2-1” and “Site2-2”.

3) If the value in [Cell Number] exceeds 1 and the checkbox “Name cell by site’s name” is not selected,

the cell name format is “Cell” + “Cell No.”, e.g.

8) In Figure 3-10, click <OK>, the two cells added will be listed in the box as shown in

Figure 3-11.

Page 105: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 105/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-8

Figure 3-11  Add a site (add cells)

9) Add TRX for the new cells. Click <Modify Cell Property> in Figure 3-11 and the

interface will pop up as shown in Figure 3-12.

Figure 3-12 Set cell property

 As shown in Figure 3-12, assign No.0, 5, 18 and 24 TRX as well as properties such

as usable frequency and network parameters to Site2-1. For more details about

advance property configuration of the cell, please refer to 4.1 Add a cell in Chapter 4.

Note:

In Figure 3-11, select the cell and click <Delete Cell> to delete it.

Page 106: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 106/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-9

10) The procedure of adding TRXs to Site2-2 is the same as that to Site2-1 described

above.

11) After configured all cell data and make sure that all TRX are assigned to cell, click

<Modify Reserved Parameters> in Figure 3-11 to modify the reserved parameters of 

newly added site, cell and TRX, the interface as shown in Figure 3-13 will pop up.

Figure 3-13 Modify reserved parameters

If not modify the reserved parameters, they have default value: 65535.

12) Click <Next> shown in Figure 3-11 after completing the data configuration of site

and cell. The dynamic configuration will begin from this step. See Figure 3-14.

Figure 3-14  Add a site (dynamic configuration)

In Figure 3-14, click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic setting

to GMPU.

Page 107: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 107/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-10

Note:

One dynamic configuration can only modify the physical link No. and the signaling connection No. of 

LAPD of the local sites under local BIE port.

13) After adding sites successfully, Select the [Cell/Modify Cell’s Handover Parameter]

to configure the adjacent relationship for the two cells. Now the configuration of 

adding a site without the TS manual adjustment is finished.

14) The following procedures will introduce how to manually adjust timeslots. In

Figure 3-3, click <OK>, a [Confirm] interface shown in Figure 3-4 will pop up.

Note:

To manually adjust timeslot, please refer to “7.4 TS manual adjustment” in M900/M1800 Base Station

Controller Data Configuration Manual - Initial Configuration.

If click <Yes> in the [Confirm] interface as shown Figure 3-4 in Step3). A [Manual

Mode] check box will appear in the [Add a Site] interface, as shown in Figure 3-15.

Check the [Manual Mode] check box.

Figure 3-15 Check [Manual Mode]

15) After “Adding Cell” described in Step 4) ~ Step 10), the TS manual adjustment

interface will pop up. See Figure 3-16.

Page 108: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 108/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-11

Figure 3-16 Timeslot manual adjustment interface

In Figure 3-16, all sites on the main chain of the newly-added sites are listed. All TRX

properties (e.g., Abis TS No., Abis sub-TS No. and trunk circuit No., etc.), RSL and

OML properties of the new sites must be input manually for the manual adjustment of 

timeslots. If sites cascading is involved, site trunk mode and BIE port property must

also be configured.

16) In Figure 3-16, select the new site and click <TRX Property>, the [TRX Property]

interface will pop up. See Figure 3-17.

Figure 3-17 TRX Property

Page 109: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 109/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-12

Note:

1) The properties listed in Figure 3-17 have default values before they are modified, e.g., the Abis TS

No. and Abis Sub-TS No. are 0, the Trunk circuit No. is 65535 and the BSC BIE E1 TimeSlot No. is 255.

2) One dynamic configuration can only modify the TRX properties of the new site, and view but not

modify the TRX properties of other sites.

3) Under TS manual adjustment mode, the physical links of RSL and OML should not be modified and

they are automatically calculated by system.

4) RSLs are multiplexed according to Abis TS No. input by the user, so data must be correct under TS

manual adjustment mode.

5) When the value in “Idle Timeslot Number” in Figure 3-17 exceeds 0, <Idle Timeslot> in Figure 3-16

will be usable. Click the button to view the idle timeslot distribution of the selected site.

6) Rev. OML Trunk Circuit No. and Rev. OML ABIS TS No. and Rev. OML BSC BIE

E1 TS No. are usable if relay mode of BIE board is full rate ring topology or half rate

ring topology.

17) Modify the RSL properties of all the new TRXs. Double click the row of the TRX

whose RSL properties are to be modified in Figure 3-17, the [RSL Property] interface

will pop up. See Figure 3-18.

Figure 3-18 RSL property configuration

18) If the new site is the cascaded site, the BIE trunk mode should be configured.Click <Site Trunk Mode Description> in Figure 3-16 and the [Site Trunk Mode]

interface will pop up. See Figure 3-19.

Page 110: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 110/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-13

Figure 3-19 Site trunk mode configuration

Reference:

[Site Frame Description Table] in M900/M1800 Base Station Controller Data

Configuration Reference – Engineering Parameters

Note:

1) “Trunk Mode No.” in Figure 3-19 should be the upper site number multiply two.

2) If relay mode of BIE board is full rate ring topology or half rate ring topology , the Rev.

Trunk Mode No. should be the upper site number multiply two plus one.

3) The BIE trunk modes of all the sites connected to all the BIE ports are listed in Figure 3-19. 

19) Click <BIE Port Property> in Figure 3-16 and the [BSC BIE Description Data]

interface will pop up. See Figure 3-20.

Page 111: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 111/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-14

Figure 3-20 BSC BIE description data configuration

Reference:

[Frame Description Table] in M900/M1800 Base Station Controller Data Configuration

Reference – Engineering Parameters. 

20) Modify the Abis interface and BS interface properties of BSC BIE ports according

to the actual demand. After modifying the trunk data of BIE, plug out and plug in the

BIE to enable the data.

21) By now timeslot manual adjustment is finished. Click <Next> in Figure 3-16 and

the dynamic configuration interface will pop up. In the wizard interface, click <Start

Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic setting of adding a site to GMPU.

IV. Verification

1) After the node icons of the newly added site are displayed on the OMC SHELL,

start the Site Maintenance System of the newly added site. If all carriers are powered

on and in normal condition, all channels in a cell will be in idle status.

2) Calls made in newly added sites can be established.

Page 112: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 112/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-15

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:

[HWII power control table], [BSC Cell table], [TRX configuration table], [Radio channel config. table],

[LAPD semi-perm. connection table], [LAPD signaling connection table], [BSC BIE active/stby. group

table], [BSC BIE description table], [Site BIE trunk mode descr. table], [Site BIE configuration table],

[Signaling channel link table], [System information table], [Cell configuration table], [Normal handover 

table], [Cell Allocation table], [BA1(BCCH) table], [BA2(SACCH) table], [Cell attribute table], [Cell alarm

threshold table], [Cell call control table], [Cell call control para. table], [Cell module information table],

[Handover control table], [GSM0508 handover table], [Load handover table], [Intra-cell cont. HO ctrl.

table], [Penalty table], [Filter table], [Emergency handover table], [Adjacent Cell Relation table], [Power 

control selection table], [Ordinary cell power control table], [BTS power control table], [MS power control

table], [Radio CH management ctrl. table], [Site description table], [Site slot description table], [Carrier 

configuration table], [External cell description table], [Fast-moving handover table], [Cell module

information table], [Frequency hopping table], [Site frame description table], [HW II channel allocation

table], [Antenna and feeder config. table], [Concentric cell handover table], [Site Software Configuration

table], [Site Reserved Parameter Table] , [Cell Reserved Parameter Table] , [TRX Reserved Parameter 

Table].

3.2 Delete a Site

I. Function

This function is used to delete sites no longer needed. When sites are deleted, all the

cells connected to them will also be deleted.

Caution:

 After deleting a site, the corresponding icon on the OMC Shell operation interface should be deleted.

II. Preparation

1) Before site deletion, block all cells through Site Maintenance System. This can

avoid conversations remaining in the site during deletion.

2) Only one site can be deleted each time. If the site to be deleted contains sub-sites

cascaded, the sub-sites cascaded must first be deleted.

Page 113: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 113/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-16

3) If the site to be deleted is not the first level site connected to BIE port and BIE port

is in the timeslot manual adjustment mode, the BIE trunk mode of the site must be

modified manually by implementing TS manual adjustment operation.

III. Procedure 

For example, to dynamically delete Site2 in BM1 (the BIE port of Site2 is in the TS

manual adjustment mode and Site2 is the sub-site of Site0.

1) Select the [BTS/Delete a Site], the [Delete a Site] interface will pop up. Select Site2

to be deleted in it as shown in Figure 3-21.

Figure 3-21 Delete a site - select site

Note:

If no site is selected or the site selected is not the last level site, <Next> in Figure 3-21 will be unusable.

2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 3-22.

Page 114: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 114/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-17

Figure 3-22 Delete site (timeslot manual adjustment)

Note:

1) If the BIE port connected to the selected site is not in TS manual adjustment mode, the dynamic

configuration interface instead of timeslot manual adjustment interface will pop up.

2) All the sites connected to the BIE port of the site, (Site2 in BM1) to be deleted will be listed in the list

box. If the connection is in multi-chain mode, all the sites of the main chain BIE port will be listed.

However, the site to be deleted will not be listed.

3) The button <Idle Timeslot> is usable, if the idle timeslot of the selected site is not 0.

Select the last site in the list box, click <Site trunk mode description> in Figure 3-22 to

manually modify the site BIE trunk mode. See Figure 3-23.

Page 115: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 115/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-18

Figure 3-23 Delete site (site BIE trunk mode)

Reference:

[Site Frame Description Table] in M900/M1800 Base Station Controller Data

Configuration Reference – Engineering Parameters. 

Site BIE Trunk Mode Description of Site2 can be deleted manually, i.e., all the records

of the site with “Trunk Mode No.” as 0 can be deleted by pressing <Delete>.

In Figure 3-22, click <TRX Property> to view the site TRX property. See Figure 3-24.

Page 116: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 116/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-19

Figure 3-24 Delete site (site TRX property)

The TRX properties of Site0 are listed in Figure 3-24.

Caution:

 Any parameter, such as Abis TS No. and Abis Sub-TS No., is not advised to be modified.

3) After TS manual adjustment, click <Next> in Figure 3-22. Then click <Start

Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic setting of deleting a site to GMPU.

See Figure 3-25.

Figure 3-25 Command list for dynamic setting

Page 117: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 117/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-20

Note:

Because there are many adjacent cells for any cell under a site, and the adjacent relationship between

the cells will be deleted after a BTS has been deleted. Therefore, the "configure handover data"

command must be executed to automatically update the adjacent relationship for the cells adjacent to

the deleted cell.

IV. Verification

Maintenance for sites deleted is not available on OMC SHELL. The system prompts

error site number. OMLs and RSLs corresponding to the sites have already been

released in switching network boards.

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:

[HWII power control table], [BSC Cell table], [TRX configuration table], [Radio channel config. table],

[LAPD semi-perm. connection table], [LAPD signaling connection table], [BSC BIE active/stby. group

table], [BSC BIE description table], [Site BIE trunk mode descr. table], [Site BIE configuration table],

[Signaling channel link table], [System information table], [Cell configuration table], [Normal handover 

table], [Cell Allocation table], [BA1(BCCH) table], [BA2(SACCH) table], [Cell attribute table], [Cell alarm

threshold table], [Cell call control table], [Cell call control para. table], [Cell module information table],

[Handover control table], [GSM0508 handover table], [Load handover table], [Intra-cell cont. HO ctrl.

table], [Penalty table], [Filter table], [Emergency handover table], [Adjacent Cell Relation table], [Power 

control selection table], [Ordinary cell power control table], [BTS power control table], [MS power control

table], [Radio CH management ctrl. table], [Site description table], [Site slot description table], [Carrier 

configuration table], [External cell description table], [Fast-moving handover table], [Cell module

information table], [Frequency hopping table], [Site frame description table], [HW II channel allocation

table], [Antenna and feeder config. table], [Concentric cell handover table], [Site Software Configuration

table] , [Site Reserved Parameter Table] , [Cell Reserved Parameter Table] , [TRX Reserved Parameter 

Table].

3.3 Add TRX

I. Function

This function is used to add carrier to the designated site. Usually used for cell

capacity expansion.

Page 118: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 118/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-21

Caution:

1) In the case of star and tree networking, if the new TRX or other equipment fails to operate, It is

recommended that BTSs on the link where this site can be located be reset successively from the one at

the uppermost level. In addition, BIE can also be reset. Check the correctness of the data configuration.

2) After successfully adding a TRX, the traffic statistics tasks of this site should be re-registered.

II. Preparation

1) Before adding the TRX, block the TRX from Site Maintenance System.

2) Dynamic adding or deleting of subsidiary chain is not supported in the system.Usually configuration of multi-chain should have been completed in the initial

configuration.

3) TRX can only be added to one site connected to one BIE port by one dynamic

configuration. To add multiple TRXs to multiple sites or to multiple BIE ports of one

site, please first perform "Add TRX" operation to one site connected to one BIE port,

then repeat the operation.

4) If the BIE port of the site to be added with TRX is in the TS manual adjustment

mode, perform timeslot manual adjustment operation to adjust the frequency

information of the site.

III. Procedure

For example, to add No.1 and No. 7 TRX to Site0-1 and Site0-2 under Site0 in BM1.

The BIE port corresponding to Site0 is in the timeslot manual adjustment mode.

1) Select the [BTS/Add TRX], the [Add TRX] interface will pop up. Select “Site0” in

BM1 as shown in Figure 3-26.

Page 119: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 119/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-22

Figure 3-26 Select site

Note:

The button <Next> in Figure 3-26 is unusable, if no site is selected.

2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 3-27.

Figure 3-27  Add TRX

Note:

 All the BIEs and BIE ports connected to the site are respectively listed in the [BIE the Site Belongs to]

drop-down box, and [Select]. Select the BIE and BIE port bearing the new TRX. However [BIE the Site

Belongs to], and [Select] are not available if there is TRX in the” Installed TRX” list, so that TRX can only

be added to one port of one BIE for each operation.

Page 120: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 120/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-23

3) After the TRX is added, click <Next> in Figure 3-27 to assign the new TRX to cells.

See Figure 3-28.

Figure 3-28 Configure cell

Note:

1) It is not allowed to add or delete the existed cells at this step. To add or delete a cell, select the

[Cell/Add Cell] or [Cell/Delete Cell].

2) If the internal transparent transmission relationship gets changed because of the new TRXs, e.g., for 

BTS30, there have been only TRX1 and TRX4, but now TRX18 is added to it, click <Modify Site

Property> to configure the site internal connections. For more details of site internal connection

configuration, refer to 3.1 Add a Site.

Select a cell in [Cell List] then click <Set Cell Property> to configure the cell property

for the cells in list. See Figure 3-29.

Page 121: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 121/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-24

Figure 3-29  Assign TRX to cell

Use “Modify CA”, user can add frequency to the Cell.

 Assign No.1 TRX to Site0-1, then double click “1 TRX” listed in the "Assigned TRX"

box, and the “TRX Property [No.1 TRX]” interface will pop up, user can assign

frequency for No.1 TRX.

 Assign No.7 TRX and assign available frequencies to Site0-2 according to the steps

described above.

 After assign all TRX to cell, click the button <Modify Reserved Parameters> in

Figure 3-28 to modify newly added TRX’s reserved parameters, otherwise these

parameters have default value: 65535.

If there is no TRX assigned to the cell, the button <Next> in Figure 3-28 is unusable.

4) Click <Next> in Figure 3-28, the timeslot manual adjustment interface will pop up.

See Figure 3-30.

Page 122: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 122/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-25

Figure 3-30 Timeslot manual adjustment

Select the newly-added site in the list box, and then respectively click <TRX

Property>, <Site Trunk Mode Description>, <BIE Port Property> to configure related

properties.

Caution:

In the ”TRX property” interface after clicking <TRX Property> as shown in Figure 3-30, only the TRX

properties of the BIE port and the site can be modified and the properties of other BIE ports or sites

cannot be modified. This principle is applicable to all dynamic configuration operations.

Note:

1) If the BIE port of the BIE bearing the TRX added is not in the TS manual adjustment mode, enter the

dynamic configuration interface as described in 3.1 Add a Site.

2) For more details of TS manual adjustment, please refer to 3.1 Add a Site.

5) Click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic setting of adding

TRX to GMPU.

IV. Verification

1) Check through the Site Maintenance System to see if the TRX added is in normal

status.

2) Test the conversation via the new TRX with test MS.

Page 123: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 123/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-26

3) Check the data tables and the host to see whether the related data has been

correctly modified.

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:

[Site BIE configuration table], [Site slot description table], [Site description table], [Antenna and feeder 

config. table], [Site frame description table], [TRX configuration table], [Carrier configuration table],

[Radio channel config. table], [LAPD semi-perm. connection table], [LAPD signaling connection table],

[Signaling channel link table], [Frequency hopping table], [Cell attribute table], [BA1(BCCH) table],

[BA2(SACCH) table], [Site BIE trunk mode descr. table], [BSC BIE description table] , [TRX Reserved

Parameter Table].

3.4 Delete TRX

I. Function

This function is used to delete a faulty carrier of a BTS, or to adjust the capacity of the

cells within the same site.

Caution:

1) In the case of star and tree networking, if system fails to operate normally, it is recommended that

BTSs on the link where this site can be located be reset successively from the one at the uppermost

level. In addition, BIE can also be reset. Check the correctness of the data configuration at the same

time.

2) After successfully deleting a TRX, the traffic statistics tasks of this site should be re-registered. (Menu:

[BTS/Startup Traffic Stat. Task Re-register])

II. Preparation

1) Block the TRX at the Site Maintenance System before deleting it in case there is

still ongoing session on the TRX.

2) To delete the TRX configured with main BCCH of the cell, first select the

[Cell/Modify TRX’s Channel Type] to modify the channel type as non-main BCCH and

Page 124: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 124/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-27

assign a new BCCH to the cell. If the main BCCH is the last one in the cell, select the

[Cell/Delete Cell] to delete the cell.

3) Only TRXs (except the TRX configured with main BCCH) of one cell in one site can

be deleted for one deletion. To delete TRXs in different sites or to delete TRXs of 

different cells in the same site, select [BTS/Delete TRX] to delete the TRX repeatedly.

4) For BTS20, the corresponding FPU will also be deleted when TRX is deleted. For 

BTS3002C-204, the corresponding MFU will also be deleted when TRX is deleted.

5) After the TRX is deleted, the rack will be deleted except for rack0 if there is no TRX

on it.

6) If the BIE port of the site in which TRX is to be deleted is in timeslot manual

adjustment mode, timeslot should be adjusted manually when deleting TRX. For more

details of timeslot manual adjustment, refer to 3.1 Add a Site or 3.3 Add TRX.

III. Procedure

To delete No.18 and No.20 TRXs of Site2 in BM1. The two TRXs are assigned to

Site2-1 which contains 3 TRXs, No.0, No.18 and No.24 TRXs.

1) Select the [BTS/Delete TRX], the [Delete TRX] interface will pop up. Select “Site2-

1” of the TRX to be deleted in it as shown in Figure 3-31.

Figure 3-31 Select cell

Note:

The button <Next> in Figure 3-31 is unusable, if no cell is selected.

Page 125: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 125/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-28

2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 3-32.

Figure 3-32 Select TRX

3) Select No.18 and No. 24 TRXs to be deleted to the “Delete TRX” list box, then click 

<Next> to continue.

Note:

It is not allowed to delete the main BCCH of the cell. Otherwise, the prompt as shown in Figure 3-33 will

pop up.

Figure 3-33 Prompt box indicating the TRX where the main BCCH is located cannot be deleted

4) Click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic setting of deleting

TRX to GMPU.

Page 126: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 126/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-29

Note:

If the BIE port of the site in which TRX is to be deleted is in TS manual adjustment mode, timeslot should

be adjusted manually when TRX is deleted. For more details of timeslot manual adjustment, refer to 3.1

 Add a Site or 3.3 Add TRX.

IV. Verification

Check to see if the designated TRXs have been deleted.

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:

[Site BIE configuration table], [Site slot description table], [Site description table], [Antenna and feeder 

config. table], [Site frame description table], [TRX configuration table], [Carrier configuration table],

[Radio channel config. table], [LAPD semi-perm. connection table], [LAPD signaling connection table],

[Signaling channel link table], [Frequency hopping table], [Cell attribute table], [BA1(BCCH) table],

[BA2(SACCH) table], [Site BIE trunk mode descr. table], [BSC BIE description table] , [TRX Reserved

Parameter Table].

3.5 Add or Delete Board

I. Function

This operation is used to standby TMU, PSU, PMU, EAC, PBU, CDU, EDU, TES,

TEU, OMU, MCK and HPA.

Caution:

1) It is not allowed to delete the active TMU/TRX/FPU/MFU/MMU.

2) FPU in BTS20 and MFU in BTS3001C cannot be separately deleted. Only when the TRX is deleted,

these boards will also be deleted.

3) Site output property and extended parameter will be adjusted as the default value when EAC is

deleted. For more details, please refer to 3.7 Modify Site and 3.8 Modify Site's Output Property.

Page 127: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 127/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-30

II. Preparation

None.

III. Procedure

1) Select the [BTS/Add or Delete Board], the [Add or Delete Board] interface will pop

up. Select the site for which the board will be added/deleted as shown in Figure 3-34.

Figure 3-34 Select site

2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 3-35.

Figure 3-35  Add/delete board

3) Click <Add/Delete BTS Board> to add/delete the board in the BTS hardware

configuration panel. See Figure 3-36.

Page 128: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 128/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-31

Figure 3-36 Configure sites device’s property

On the site device’s panel, select the board to be deleted, then press <Delete> from

the keyboard to delete the board. Or, select and right click the board, then select the

[Add] or [Delete] in the pop-up floating menu to add or delete the board.

Note:

TRX cannot be deleted in this operation.

4) Click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic setting of 

adding/deleting BTS board to GMPU.

Figure 3-37  Add or delete board

Page 129: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 129/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-32

IV. Verification

Board status is normal when viewed from the Site Maintenance System.

Check the data tables and the host to see whether the related data has been correctlymodified.

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:

[Site frame description table], [Site slot description table], [Antenna and feeder config. table], [Site

description table].

3.6 Modify Board Type

I. Function

This operation is used to online modify CDU, EDU, TRX, PBU card type.

II. Preparation

None.

III. Procedure

1) Select the [BTS/Modify Board Type], the [Modify Board Type] interface will pop up.

Select the site for which the board type will be modified as shown in Figure 3-38.

Figure 3-38 Select Site (Modify Site Board Type)

Page 130: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 130/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-33

2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 3-39.

Figure 3-39 Modify Board Type (Modify Site Board Type)

Click <Modify BTS Board Type>, the interface will be shown in Figure 3-40.

Figure 3-40 Site Device’s Property

Click <Modify BTS Board Type> to enter the interface shown in Figure 3-47.

3) To modify PBU board type, double click PBU card to enter the interface of PBU

property as shown in Figure 3-41.

Page 131: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 131/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-34

Figure 3-41 Set PBU Board Property

4) To modify CDU board type, double click CDU card to enter the interface of CDU

property as shown in Figure 3-42.

Figure 3-42 Set CDU Board property

5) To modify EDU board type, double click EDU card to enter the interface of EDU

property as shown in Figure 3-43.

Page 132: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 132/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-35

Figure 3-43 Set REDU Board Property

6) To modify TRX board type, double click TRX card to enter the interface of TRX

property as shown in Figure 3-44.

Figure 3-44 Set TRX Board Type

Page 133: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 133/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-36

Note:

There is a restriction on TRX card type and TRX frequency .Frequency of PTRX must within 1-124.

Frequency of ETRX must within 0-124 or 975-1023. Frequency of RTRX must within 0-124 or 955-1023.

Frequency of DTRX must within 512-885.

Click <complete> in Figure 3-40 to finish modification.

7) Click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement dynamic setting of modifying

Site board type. See Figure 3-48.

IV. Verification

Check the data tables to see whether the related data has been correctly modified.

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:

[Site Slot Description Table].

3.7 Modify Site Data

I. Function

This operation is used to online modify the clock mode, clock parameter and

transmission mode of the site. If the transmission mode is modified, 4th level reset

command will be sent from BSC Data Auto Configuration System.

II. Preparation

None.

III. Procedure

1) Select the [BTS/Modify Site's Extended Parameter], the [Modify Site's Extended

Parameter] interface will pop up. Select the site for which the clock parameters will be

modified as shown in Figure 3-45.

Page 134: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 134/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-37

Figure 3-45 Select site

2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 3-46.

Figure 3-46 Modify clock parameter 

3) Click <Modify Site’s Ext Parameter> to enter the interface shown in Figure 3-47.

Page 135: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 135/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-38

Figure 3-47 Modify equipment property of a site

Reference:

[Site Description Table] in M900/M1800 Base Station Controller Data Configuration

Reference – Engineering Parameters. 

In Figure 3-47, modify site’s parameter and click <OK> to complete the modification.

4) Click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement dynamic setting of modifying site

clock parameters to GMPU. See Figure 3-48.

Figure 3-48 Command list for dynamic configuration

Page 136: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 136/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-39

IV. Verification

The clock parameter is correctly modified when viewed from the Site Maintenance

System.

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:

[Site Description Table].

3.8 Modify Site's Output Property

I. Function

This operation is used to online modify the EAC relay status of the site. This operation

can only be implemented to the site configured with EACs.

II. Preparation

Make sure that the site whose output properties are to be modified has been

configured with EAC. If no EAC is configured to the site, select the [BTS/Add or Delete Board] described in 3.5  Add or Delete Board to add an EAC.

III. Procedure

1) Select the [BTS/Modify Site's Output Property], the [Modify Site's Output Property]

interface will pop up. Select the site for which the output property is to be modified as

shown in Figure 3-49.

Figure 3-49 Select site

Page 137: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 137/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-40

2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 3-50.

Figure 3-50 Modify site output parameter 

3) Click <Modify Site Output> to modify EAC relay status.

4) After modifying EAC relay status, click <Next> in Figure 3-50 to continue. In the

dynamic configuration interface, click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the

dynamic setting of modifying site output property to GMPU.

IV. Verification

Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run BSC Data Management System tocheck the [Site/Site Description Table]

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:

[Site Description Table].

3.9 Startup Traffic Stat. Task Re-register 

I. Function

This operation is used to start up traffic statistics task re-registration online. This

function is usually used to renew the permanent traffic statistics task. It is usually

used for some critical operations that impacts cell handover relationship, e.g., to

dynamically add/delete a site, add/delete TRX, add/delete a cell, modify cell

adjacency relationship and modify CGI etc.

Page 138: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 138/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-41

II. Preparation

None.

III. Procedure

1) Select the [BTS/Startup Traffic Stat. Task Re-register], the [Startup Traffic Stat. Task

Re-register] interface will pop up. Select startup mode in it as shown in Figure 3-51.

Figure 3-51 Startup traffic statistics task re-register 

2) Click <Next> to continue.

3) Click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic setting of starting

up traffic statistics task re-registration to GMPU. See Figure 3-52.

Figure 3-52 Command list during dynamic setting

Note:

No modification of any data table is related to this operation.

Page 139: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 139/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-42

3.10 Rename Site or Cell

I. Function

This function is used to rename site or cell. All sites and cells can be renamed in one

dynamic operation.

II. Preparation

None.

III. Procedure

1) Select the [BTS/Rename Site or Cell], the [Rename Site or Cell] interface will pop

up in Figure 3-53.

Figure 3-53 Rename Site or Cell

First select site or cell that need be renamed, then click <Rename Selected Object>

in Figure 3-53. Rename dialog box will be shown in Figure 3-54 or Figure 3-55according to the type of selected object (site or cell).

Figure 3-54 Rename Site

Page 140: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 140/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-43

Figure 3-55 Rename Cell

Note:

Only site or cell can be renamed in Figure 3-53. Please select [Cell/External Cell/Modify] operation to

rename external cell.

2) After renaming sites and cells, click <Next> in Figure 3-53 to continue. In the

dynamic configuration interface, click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the

dynamic configuration of renaming site or cell.

IV. Verification

Check the data tables to see whether the related data has been correctly modified.

Page 141: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 141/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-44

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:

[BSC cell table], [TRX configuration table], [radio channel configuration table], [site BIE configuration

table], [signaling channel link table], [system information table], [cell configuration table], [normal

handover table], [cell allocation table], [BA1 (BCCH) table], [BA2 (SACCH) table], [cell attribute table],

[cell alarm threshold table], [cell call control table], [cell call control parameter table], [cell description

table], [Handover control table], [GSM0508 handover table], [load handover table], [intra-cell continuous

HO control table], [penalty table], [filter table], [emergency handover table], [adjacent cell relation table],

[power control selection table], [ordinary cell power control table], [BTS power control table], [MS power 

control table], [radio channel management control table], [site description table], [site slot description

table], [carrier configuration table], [fast-moving handover table], [site frame description table], [HW II

channel allocation table], [Site Reserved Parameter Table] , [Cell Reserved Parameter Table] , [TRX

Reserved Parameter Table].

3.11 Modify Ring Topology Mark

I. Function

This function is used to modify ring topology mark. For example, add or delete

reverse ring port in ring topology.

II. Preparation

None.

III. Procedure

1) Select the [BTS/Modify Ring Topology Mark], the [Modify Ring Topology Mark]

interface will pop up in Figure 3-56.

Page 142: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 142/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-45

Figure 3-56 Select BIE Board (Modify Ring Topology Mark)

Select BIE board to activate button <Next>.

Note:

Only the BIE board whose relay mode is full rate ring topology or half rate ring topology can be selected

in Figure 3-56.

2) Click <Next> in Figure 3-56, the interface will be shown in

Figure 3-57 Modify Topology Mark (Modify Ring Topology Mark)

First select BIE port that need modify ring topology mark. If the selected BIE port has

already reverse ring port, the button <delete topology mark> will be usable and the

button <add topology mark> will be unusable, otherwise the button <add topology

Page 143: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 143/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-46

mark> will be usable and the button <delete topology mark> will be unusable. Only

one BIE port’s ring topology mark can be modified in one dynamic operation.

 A. Step of adding topology mark:

 After selecting BIE port, then select the site that will connect to reverse ring port, click

<add topology mark> to enter the interface shown in Figure 3-58.

Figure 3-58 Configure Closed Loop BIE Port

Select closed loop BIE port in Figure 3-58, then click <OK> to return Figure 3-57.

B. Step of deleting topology mark

 After selecting BIE port, click <delete topology mark> to delete reverse BIE port.

3) After modifying ring topology mark, click <Next> in to continue. In the dynamic

configuration interface, click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic

configuration of modifying ring topology mark.

Figure 3-59 Dynamic Configuration (Modify Ring Topology Mark)

IV. Verification

Check the data tables to see whether the related data has been correctly modified.

Page 144: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 144/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data

 

3-47

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:

[radio channel configuration table], [LAPD semi-perm. Connection table], [LAPD signaling connection

table], [BSC BIE description table], [site BIE trunk mode description table], [site BIE configuration table],

[signaling channel link table], [site description table], [trunk circuit table], [BSC BIE semi-permanent

connection table], [BSC BIE active/stby. group table].

Page 145: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 145/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-1

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

This section is an introduction to online add and delete cells and modify cell

properties.

4.1 Add Cell

I. Function

This function is used to online add one or more cells. Generally one cell will be added

at each time.

Caution:

1) In the case of chain and tree networking, if the new cell fails to operate normally, it is recommended

that BTSs on the link where this site located be reset successively from the one at the uppermost level.

In addition, BIE can also be reset. Check the correctness of the data configuration.

2) After successfully adding a cell, the Startup Traffic Statistics Re-register should be performed. (BTS\Startup Traffic Stat. Re-register)

II. Preparation

1) TRX also will be added during the process of the "Add Cell" operation. Each

dynamic configuration only can add a cell and its TRX to one site under one BIE port.

If the TRXs of the new cell are distributed in multiple BIE ports, select the [BTS/Add

TRX] to add TRX after the 4.1  Add Cell operation.

2) If adding a TRX during adding a cell changes the port cascade relationship of a site,

be sure to modify Internal Site Port Cascade Relationship. For more details, refer to

 Add a site or  Add TRX in Chapter 3.

3) If the new cell has adjacent relationship with others, please Select the [Cell/Modify

Cell’s Handover Parameter] to configure the adjacent relationship between two cells

after adding the cell.

Page 146: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 146/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-2

4) If the BIE port of the site to which the new cell is added is in Manual Mode of 

timeslot adjustment, be sure to manually adjust timeslot. For more details, refer to

 Add a Site or  Add TRX in Chapter 3.

5) Dynamic adding or deleting of subsidiary chain is not supported in the system.

Usually configuration of multi-chain should have been completed in the initial

configuration.

III. Procedure

For example, add a non-FH cell without adjacent cells to Site0 in BM1.

1) Select the [Cell/Add Cell], the [Add Cell] interface will pop up. Select the BTS to be

added cell as shown in Figure 4-1.

Figure 4-1 Select site

2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-2.

Figure 4-2  Add TRX

Page 147: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 147/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-3

Note:

This step is the same as the operation in " Add TRX ". For more details, please refer to " Add TRX ".

3) Select "2 TRX" and "3 TRX" to be added and click <Next> to continue. See

Figure 4-3.

Figure 4-3  Add cell

4) Click <Modify Site Property> to configure the property of the BTS hardware.

If the newly-added TRX changes the internal transparent transmission relationship

inside the site, be sure to modify the site internal cascading connections here, i.e.,

click <Inter-Site Link> in the [Site Device’s Property] interface. For more details, refer 

to Add a site in Chapter 3.

Note:

In Figure 4-3, all the existing cells and added cell of "Site0", are listed in the "Cell List". But <Delete Cell>

is only for the cells added in this step.

5) In Figure 4-3, click <Add Cell> and the interface will pop up as shown in Figure 4-4.

Page 148: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 148/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-4

Figure 4-4 Modify cell basic information

Input the corresponding cell information here. For more parameter descriptions,

please refer to the step of adding cell in " Add a Site". Then click <OK> to continue.

The newly-added cell, Site0-3, is now listed in [Cell List]. See Figure 4-5.

Figure 4-5  Add cell (Site0-3)

6) In Figure 4-5, select the new cell and click <Modify Cell Property> and the interface

will pop up as shown in Figure 4-6.

Page 149: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 149/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-5

Figure 4-6 Figure Set cell property

 After configuring the properties of the cells added, click <Next> to continue.

7) If the BIE port of the site in which the newly added cell is located, is in the Manual

Mode of timeslot adjustment, be sure to manually adjust the timeslot. See Figure 4-7.

Otherwise go to Step 8) directly.

For more details, refer to Add a Site or  Add TRX in Chapter 3.

Figure 4-7  Adjust manually

 After finishing timeslot adjustment, click <Next> to continue.

Page 150: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 150/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-6

8) Click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration of 

adding the new cell. See Figure 4-8.

Figure 4-8 Command list during dynamic configuration

IV. Verification

1) When the Site Maintenance System is running, object representing the newly

added cell can be displayed.

2) Check the channel status of the cell. If all carriers are powered on and in normal

condition, all channels in a cell will be in idle status. Calls can be established on newlyadded cells.

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:

[HWII power control table], [BSC Cell table], [TRX configuration table], [Radio channel config. table],

[LAPD semi-perm. connection table], [LAPD signaling connection table], [BSC BIE active/stby. group

table], [BSC BIE description table], [Site BIE trunk mode descr. table], [Site BIE configuration table],

[Signaling channel link table], [System information table], [Cell configuration table], [Normal handover table], [Cell Allocation table], [BA1(BCCH) table], [BA2(SACCH) table], [Cell attribute table], [Cell alarm

threshold table], [Cell call control table], [Cell call control para. table], [Cell module information table],

[Handover control table], [GSM0508 handover table], [Load handover table], [Intra-cell cont. HO ctrl.

table], [Penalty table], [Filter table], [Emergency handover table], [Adjacent Cell Relation table], [Power 

control selection table], [Ordinary cell power control table], [BTS power control table], [MS power control

table], [Radio CH management ctrl. table], [Site description table], [Site slot description table], [Carrier 

configuration table], [External cell description table], [Fast-moving handover table], [Cell module

information table], [Frequency hopping table], [Site frame description table], [HW II channel allocation

Page 151: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 151/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-7

table], [Antenna and feeder config. table], [Concentric cell handover table], [Site Software Configuration

table], [Cell reserved parameter table], [TRX reserved parameter table].

4.2 Delete Cell

I. Function

This function is used to online delete a cell. Only one cell should be deleted at a time.

Caution:

1) In the case of chain and tree networking, if the site whose cell has been deleted fails to operate

normally, it is recommended that BTSs on the link where this site can be located be reset successively

from the one at the uppermost level. In addition, BIE can also be reset. Check the correctness of the

data configuration.

2) After successfully adding a cell, the Startup Traffic Statistics Re-register should be performed. (BTS\

Startup Traffic Stat. Re-register)

II. Preparation

1) Before this cell deletion, block operation should be executed through Site

Maintenance System for the specific cells. This avoids remaining conversation during

deleting cell.

2) When the cell is deleted, all the TRXs of it will also be deleted. It is not allowed to

delete the cell which is the only one of a site, while to select the [BTS/Delete a Site] to

delete it, please refer to Delete a Site in Chapter 3.

3) If the BIE port of the site in which the cell to be deleted is in the Manual Mode of 

timeslot adjustment, be sure to manually adjust the timeslot. For more details, refer to

 Add a Site or  Add TRX in Chapter 3.

III. Procedure

For example, delete the cell "Site 0-1" in Site0 in BM1. The BIE port of Site0 is not in

Manual Mode of timeslot adjustment.

1) Select the [Cell/Delete Cell], the [Delete Cell] interface will pop up. Select the cell

to be deleted in it as shown in Figure 4-9.

Page 152: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 152/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-8

Figure 4-9 Select cell

Caution:

If there is only one cell in the BTS, it is not allowed to delete this cell. Please delete the BTS to delete the

cell. <Next> button is unavailable and system will hint that current operation is not allowed, if this cell has

been selected.

2) Click <Next> to continue.

3) If the BIE port of the site in which the cell to be deleted is in the Manual Mode of 

timeslot adjustment, be sure to adjust manually timeslot. See Figure 4-10. Otherwise

go to Step 4) directly.

For more details, refer to Add a Site or  Add TRX in Chapter 3.

Page 153: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 153/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-9

Figure 4-10  Adjust manually

4) Click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration of 

deleting cell. See Figure 4-11.

Figure 4-11 Command list during dynamic configuration

IV. Verification

View from the Site Maintenance System, the specified cell has been deleted.

Page 154: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 154/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-10

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:

[HWII power control table], [BSC Cell table], [TRX configuration table], [Radio channel config. table],[LAPD semi-perm. connection table], [LAPD signaling connection table], [BSC BIE active/stby. group

table], [BSC BIE description table], [Site BIE trunk mode descr. table], [Site BIE configuration table],

[Signaling channel link table], [System information table], [Cell configuration table], [Normal handover 

table], [Cell Allocation table], [BA1(BCCH) table], [BA2(SACCH) table], [Cell attribute table], [Cell alarm

threshold table], [Cell call control table], [Cell call control para. table], [Cell module information table],

[Handover control table], [GSM0508 handover table], [Load handover table], [Intra-cell cont. HO ctrl.

table], [Penalty table], [Filter table], [Emergency handover table], [Adjacent Cell Relation table], [Power 

control selection table], [Ordinary cell power control table], [BTS power control table], [MS power control

table], [Radio CH management ctrl. table], [Site description table], [Site slot description table], [Carrier 

configuration table], [External cell description table], [Fast-moving handover table], [Cell module

information table], [Frequency hopping table]. [Site frame description table], [HW II channel allocation

table], [Antenna and feeder config. table], [Concentric cell handover table], [Site Software Configuration

table], [Cell reserved parameter table], [TRX reserved parameter table].

4.3 Modify BCC and NCC

I. Function

This function is used to online modify NCC (network color code) and BCC (BTS color 

code). NCCs and BCCs of multiple cells can be modified at a time. The number of all

selected cells cannot be more than 10.

Caution:

This function has an effect on the calls established within this cell.

II. Preparation

Block operation for the entire cell should be performed through the Site Maintenance

System.

Page 155: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 155/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-11

III. Procedure

1) Select the [Cell/Modify BCC and NCC], the [Modify BCC and NCC] interface will

pop up. Select the cells to be modified in it as shown in Figure 4-12.

Figure 4-12 Select cell

Caution:

In view of the load of GMPU, commands generated by dynamic operation are restricted. The commands

set to GMPU at a time cannot be more than 255 per BM module. The commands generated by dynamic

operation are the total of the ones generated by current operation and related ones, e.g., the command

generated by the current operation of modifying BCC and NCC is "Modify BCC and NCC", the related

command is "Modify Cell's Handover Parameter".

The reason is the same as described above that the commands generated by dynamic operation cannot

be more than 255 in the following operations. So the number if cells to be dynamic configured is almost

unlimited except “Modify NCC and BCC”, “Modify Cell’s Channel Management Parameter”, “Modify

Cell’s Install Status” and “Modify GPRS Function”. These dynamic configurations can only operate 10

cells at most once because of the limitation of GMPU.

2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-13.

Page 156: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 156/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-12

Figure 4-13 Modify the BCC and BCC

3) Modify NCC and BCC of each cell, and then click <Next> to continue. Click <Start

Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration of modifying NCC

and BCC of the cell. See Figure 4-14.

Figure 4-14 Command list during dynamic configuration

IV. Verification

1) View the NCC and BCC of the modified cell through the Site Maintenance System.

2) View the NCC and BCC of the modified cell included in system information sent by

cell with test MS.

Page 157: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 157/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-13

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:

[Cell module information table], [Handover control table], [GSM0508 handover table], [Load handover table], [Intra-cell cont. HO ctrl. table], [Penalty table], [Filter table], [Emergency handover table],

[Adjacent Cell Relation table], [Normal handover table], [BA1(BCCH) table], [BA2(SACCH) table],

[External cell description table], [Fast-moving handover table], [Concentric cell handover table], [BSC

Cell table], [Frequency hopping table].

4.4 Modify Cell's Property

I. Function

This function is used in the dynamic modification of cell property data such as

interference threshold, SACCH multiframe number, CCCH payload threshold, RACH

busy threshold, and other property value that characterize the property of this cell.

Caution:

To modify the cell extending type as "Normal Cell", "Single Timeslot Extension Cell" or "Double Timeslot

Extension Cell", please select the [Cell/Modify Double Timeslots Related Property] to modify the property.

II. Preparation

None.

III. Procedure

1) Select the [Cell/Modify Cell's Property], the [Modify Cell's Property] interface will

pop up. Select the cell to be modified in it as shown in Figure 4-15.

Page 158: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 158/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-14

Figure 4-15 Select cell

2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-16.

Figure 4-16 Select the cell whose property is to be modified

3) Select each cell and modify its property. After the modification, click <Next> to

continue and the interface will pop up as shown in Figure 4-17.

Page 159: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 159/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-15

Figure 4-17 Modify cell property

Reference:

"5. Cell Property" in "8.4.1 Default Data" in M900/M1800 Base Station Controller 

Data Configuration Reference – Initial Configuration 

4) Click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration of 

modifying cell property. See Figure 4-18.

Figure 4-18 Command list during dynamic configuration

IV. Verification

View the property parameters of the corresponding cells from the Site Maintenance

System.

Page 160: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 160/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-16

Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run BSC Data Management System to

check the [Cell/Cell Attribute Table].

4.5 Modify Cell's Call Control Parameter 

I. Function

This function is used to online modify the call processing parameters including [Cell

call control table] and [Cell call control para. table].

II. Preparation

None.

III. Procedure

1) Select the [Cell/Modify Cell's Call Control Parameter], the [Modify Cell's Call

Control Parameter] interface will pop up. Select the cell to be modified in it as shown

in Figure 4-19.

Figure 4-19 Select cell

2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-20.

Page 161: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 161/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-17

Figure 4-20 Select the cell whose parameter is to be modified

3) Select the cell in the [Current Cell] box and click <Modify Cell Call Control

Parameter> to modify its call processing parameter. See Figure 4-21.

Figure 4-21 Modify call control parameter 

Reference:

"2. Call Control" in "8.4.1 Default Data" in M900/M1800 Base Station Controller Data

Configuration Reference – Initial Configuration 

4) After modifying the call control parameter and cell call processing parameter, click

<Next>. And then click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to the dynamic configuration of 

modifying cell call control and processing parameters. See Figure 4-22.

Page 162: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 162/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-18

Figure 4-22 Command list during dynamic configuration

IV. Verification

1) Use test MS to do call test.

2) Check the call control parameter of the cell in the tracing result of Abis interface.

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:[Cell call control table], [Cell call control para. table].

4.6 Modify Cell's Alarm Limit

I. Function

This function is used to modify the alarm threshold parameter of the cell.

II. Preparation

None.

III. Procedure

1) Select the [Cell/Modify Cell's Alarm Limit], the [Modify Cell's Alarm Limit] interface

will pop up. Select the cell to be modified in it as shown in Figure 4-23.

Page 163: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 163/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-19

Figure 4-23 Select cell

2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-24.

Figure 4-24 Modify alarm parameter 

Reference:

"1. Alarm Limit" in "8.4.1 Default Data" in M900/M1800 Base Station Controller Data

Configuration Reference – Initial Configuration 

3) Select each cell and modify the alarm threshold parameters one by one. After the

modification, click <Next> to continue. Click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to

implement the dynamic configuration of modifying cell alarm threshold. See

Figure 4-25.

Page 164: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 164/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-20

Figure 4-25 Command list during dynamic configuration

IV. Verification

Query all alarm threshold parameters from the Site Maintenance System.

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:

[Cell alarm threshold table].

4.7 Modify Cell's FH Property

I. Function

This function is used to online modify FH mode of the cell, including transformation

from non-FH cells to FH cells, and from FH cells to non-FH cells; and to online modify

FH data of the cell, including HSN, TSC, MA, MAIO, etc.

The system supports baseband FH and RF FH. Baseband FH includes FH with main

BCCH and FH without main BCCH.

Caution:

This function has an effect on the call carried out within this cell.

Page 165: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 165/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-21

II. Preparation

1) Block the cell from the Site Maintenance System first.

2) The single frequency cell can not be modified as FH cell and baseband FH is not

supported by BTS20 or double-TS cell. For the double-TS cell and baseband FH cell,

TRXs belonging to the same MA group enjoy the same TRX concentric properties.

3) The same MA group of GSM 900&1800 cell enjoys the frequencies of same

frequency band.

The cell with a single TRX can not be modified as FH cell and baseband FH is not

supported by BTS20. For the double timeslots extension cell participating in

baseband FH, One MA group can only be employed by the TRXs which concentric

properties are same.

III. Procedures

For example, to modify the cell "Site1-1" in BM1 as RF FH cell and "Site1-2" as FH

cell with main BCCH.

1) Select the [Cell/Modify Cell's FH Property], the [Modify Cell's FH Property] interface

will pop up. Select the cells, "Site1-1" and "Site1-2," to be modified in it as shown in

Figure 4-26.

Figure 4-26 Select cell

2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-27.

Page 166: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 166/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-22

Figure 4-27 Modify FH property

3) Select "Site1-1" and modify its cell FH. Click <Modify Cell FH> to enter the

interface shown in Figure 4-28.

Figure 4-28 Modify FH property

Reference:

"8.4.2 FH property" in M900/M1800 Base Station Controller Data Configuration

Reference – Initial Configuration 

In Figure 4-28, modify FH mode as RF FH and the [Confirm] dialogue "This operation

can not be resumed. Continue (Yes/No)?" will pop up. Click <Yes> to confirm. Then all

the effective frequencies of this cell will be configured into an MA group in default, the

number of MA group is 0. Now timeslots of all the TRXs belongs to MA 0 and,

<Configure MA Group> in the interface is available. Click it to add MA groups and

configure HSN. For more details of adding FH MA groups, please refer to Step 5).

Page 167: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 167/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-23

Note:

1) In Figure 4-28, click < MAIO Synchronization By Timeslot> to synchronize the FH Group Number and

MAIO of all timeslots in every TRX as that of the current timeslot.2) < MAIO Synchronization By Timeslot> is available to every timeslot if FH mode is RF FH.

3) When the FH mode of RF FH cell is modified as "Not FH" , all the original frequencies of TRXs will be

deleted except for the one of main BCCH TRX. Be sure to re-allocate frequencies to the TRXs without

main BCCH TRX by double clicking the TRX listed in the [TRX No.] list shown in Figure 4-28.

4) Can’t change “RF FH” to “Base FH” directly and vice verse. You should change it to “Not FH” first and

then change it to corresponding FH mode.

4) In Figure 4-27, select "Site1-2" and click <Modify Cell FH>. The interface as

Figure 4-28 will pop up. In the [FH Property-Site1-2] interface, select "Baseband FH"

in the [FH Mode] drop-down list box, then click <Yes> in the [Confirm] pop-up

dialogue "Does the baseband FH support timeslot FH?". Then the TRX with main

BCCH will participate in the baseband FH.

5) When FH with main BCCH is selected, 2 FH groups will be configured to the cell by

default. One contains main BCCH frequency (FH Group No.1), and the other does not

(FH Group No.0). Now <Configure MA Group> is available and click it to add MA

groups. See Figure 4-29.

Figure 4-29 Set MA group

In Figure 4-29, add or delete MA group number in Zone1, select current MA group

number in Zone2 and the frequencies in Zone3 vary accordingly with different

selection in Zone2. The frequencies in Zone3 can also be modified manually.

Page 168: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 168/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-24

Caution:

1) 

When FH with main BCCH is selected, <MAIO Synchronization By Timeslot> in Figure 4-28 isunavailable to the timeslot of main BCCH, i.e., TS0. It is only available to TS1~TS7.

2) In Figure 4-28, "FH Group No." is the number of the FH group among all the FH groups in this cell.

6) In Figure 4-28, double click the TRX listed in the [TRX No.] list to configure

frequency, as shown in Figure 4-30.

Figure 4-30 Modify frequency

7) After modification, click <Next>. And then click <Start Dynamic Configuration> toimplement the dynamic configuration of modifying cell FH property. See Figure 4-31.

Page 169: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 169/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-25

Figure 4-31 Command list during dynamic configuration

IV. Verification

1) Check FH data and channel status of the corresponding cells from the Site

Maintenance System.

2) Check the traffic of this cell in the traffic statistics system, compare the traffic

changing.

3) If necessary, use the test MS to check the FH data of this cell and do call test.

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:

[Cell configuration table], [Cell Allocation table], [Radio channel config. table], [Carrier configuration

table], [Frequency hopping table], [BA1 (BCCH) table], [BA2 (SACCH) table].

4.8 Modify Cell's Handover Parameter 

I. Function

This function is used to online modify the cell handover parameters, including

handover parameter, adjacent relationship, BA1 and BA2 table.

Page 170: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 170/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-26

Caution:

1) The modification of cell adjacent relationship can create the single directional adjacent relationshipand the bidirectional adjacent relationship of two cells.

2) Cell BA1 and BA2 tables data will be refreshed automatically according to the adjacent relationships

of the current cell and the BCCH frequencies of the adjacent cells by the system.

3) BA1 table and BA2 table can be configured manually, but be sure to select "User Input" in the [Cell

BA1 & BA2 Table] interface. If BA1 & BA2 tables data is to be modified later, such as to modify cell

effective frequency and BCCH frequency of adjacent cell, they should be modified manually since they

will not be modified automatically by the system.

II. Preparation

None.

III. Procedure

1) Select the [Cell/Modify Cell's Handover Parameter], the [Modify Cell's Handover 

Parameter] interface will pop up. Select the cell to be modified in it as shown in

Figure 4-32.

Figure 4-32 Select cell

2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-33.

Page 171: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 171/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-27

Figure 4-33 Modify cell handover data

3) Select each cell and click <Modify Handover Parameter> to enter the interface

shown in Figure 4-34.

Figure 4-34 Modify handover control data

Reference:

"8.4.4 Handover Parameter" in M900/M1800 Base Station Controller Data

Configuration Reference – Initial Configuration 

4) In Figure 4-33, select each cell and click <Modify Adjacent Relationship> to enter 

the interface shown in Figure 4-35.

Page 172: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 172/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-28

Figure 4-35 Modify adjacent relationship property

Reference:

 Adjacent Cell Relation Table in M900/M1800 Base Station Controller Data

Configuration Reference – Initial Configuration

Note:

In Figure 4-35, all the cells in all the BMs and the external cells in other BSC will be listed in "System cell

list". The corresponding cell or external cell can be selected to configured adjacent relationship.

5) In Figure 4-33, select each cell and click <Modify BA1 and BA2 Table> to enter the

interface shown in Figure 4-36.

Page 173: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 173/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-29

Figure 4-36 Modify BA1 and BA2 table

 All the BA1 and BA2 tables are automatically generated. To make a special modify,

please select "User Input" first.

6) After modification, click <Next> shown in Figure 4-33. And then click <Start

Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration of modifying cell

handover. See Figure 4-37.

Figure 4-37 Command list during dynamic configuration

IV. Verification

1) Check the traffic statistics of handover from traffic statistics system.

2) Do call test including handover test with the test MS.

Page 174: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 174/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-30

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:

[Cell module information table], [Handover control table], [GSM0508 handover table], [Load handover table], [Intra-cell cont. HO ctrl. table], [Penalty table], [Filter table], [Emergency handover table],

[Adjacent Cell Relation table], [Normal handover table], [BA1(BCCH) table], [BA2(SACCH) table],

[External cell description table], [Fast-moving handover table], [Concentric cell handover table].

4.9 Modify Cell's Power Control Parameter 

I. Function

This function is used to modify the power control parameter of a cell, including normal

cell power control, BTS power control, MS power control, Huawei II power control, etc.

II. Preparation

None.

III. Procedure

1) Select the [Cell/Modify Cell's Power Control Parameter], the [Modify Cell's Power Control Parameter] interface will pop up. Select the cell to be modified in it as shown

in Figure 4-38.

Figure 4-38 Select cell

2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-39.

Page 175: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 175/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-31

Figure 4-39 Modify cell power control data

3) Select each cell and click <Modify Power Control Parameter> to enter the interface

shown in Figure 4-40.

Figure 4-40 Configure power control parameter 

Reference:

"8.4.6 Power Control Parameter" in M900/M1800 Base Station Controller Data

Configuration Reference – Initial Configuration 

4) After modifying power control parameter, click <Next> shown in Figure 4-39. Click

<Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration of modifying

cell power control parameter. See Figure 4-41.

Page 176: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 176/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-32

Figure 4-41 Command list dynamic during dynamic configuration

IV. Verification

Check the corresponding power control parameter by viewing the host data.

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:

[HWII power control table], [Power control selection table], [Ordinary cell power control table], [BTS

power control table], [MS power control table].

4.10 Modify Cell's Channel Management Parameter 

I. Function

This function is used to modify the cell channel management parameters, including

radio channel management control parameters and HW II channel allocation

algorithm.

II. Preparation

None.

Page 177: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 177/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-33

III. Procedure 

1) Select the [Cell/Modify Cell's Channel Management Parameter], the [Modify Cell's

Channel Management Parameter] interface will pop up. Select the cell to be modifiedin it as shown in Figure 4-42.

Figure 4-42 Select cell

2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-43.

Figure 4-43 Select the cell whose parameter is to be modified

3) Select each cell and click <Modify Cell’s Channel Management Parameter> to

enter the interface shown in Figure 4-44.

Page 178: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 178/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-34

Figure 4-44 Configure cell channel management parameter 

Reference:

"8.4.7 Channel Management Parameter" in M900/M1800 Base Station Controller 

Data Configuration Reference – Initial Configuration 

4) After modification, click <OK>. Then in the interface shown in Figure 4-43, click

<Next>. In the interface shown in Figure 4-45, click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to

implement the dynamic configuration, i.e., the data of modified cell channelmanagement parameter property.

Figure 4-45 Command list during dynamic data configuration

IV. Verification

Select the [Start/Task/Data Management/Operations/View Host Data…] to check the

host data.

Page 179: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 179/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-35

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:

[Radio CH management ctrl. table], [HW II channel allocation table].

4.11 Modify Cell's CGI

I. Function

This function is used to modify CGI (Global Cell Identification). The number of the

cells to be selected for one dynamic operation cannot exceed 10.

Caution:

1) This function has an effect on the call served by this cell.

2) Modification of CGI involves data of MSC. Therefore, when modifying CGI, guarantee the consistency

of the relative data. Otherwise, the cell will fail to implement location updating and call establishment.

3) Hexadecimal system is adopted for CGI.

II. Preparation

Perform block processing for a designated cell from the Site Maintenance System.

III. Procedure

1) Select the [Cell/Modify Cell's CGI], the [Modify Cell's CGI] interface will pop up.

Select a cell to be modified in it as shown in Figure 4-46.

Page 180: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 180/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-36

Figure 4-46 Select cell

2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-47.

Figure 4-47 Modify cell's CGI

3) Select each cell, modify CGI. After modification, click <Next>.

4) Click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration of 

CGI. See Figure 4-48.

Page 181: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 181/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-37

Figure 4-48 Command list for Dynamic Configuration Procedure

IV. Verification

1) Check CGI in cell system message received with a test MS.

2) Check CGI by tracing Abis interface of this cell.

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:[BSC Cell table], [Cell module information table], [External cell description table], [Cell module

information table], [Frequency hopping table].

4.12 Modify Cell's System Information

I. Function

This function is used to modify system information parameters, including [Cell

configuration table], [System information table], [BA1(BCCH) table] and [BA2(SACCH)

table]. For the configuration of "SMCBC DRX", please refer to 4.13 Modify Cell's

Broadcast DRX Property.

II. Preparation

None.

Page 182: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 182/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-38

III. Procedure

1) Select the [Cell/Modify Cell's System Information], the [Modify Cell's System

Information] interface will pop up. Select the cell to be modified in it as shown inFigure 4-49.

Figure 4-49 Select cell

2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-50.

Figure 4-50 Select the cell whose parameter is to be modified

3) Select each cell and click <Modify Cell Configuration Data> to enter the interface

shown in Figure 4-51.

Page 183: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 183/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-39

Figure 4-51 Modify Cell Configuration Data

Reference:

8.4.1 Default Data" in M900/M1800 Base Station Controller Data Configuration

Reference – Initial Configuration 

4) Select each cell and click <Modify Cell System Information> to enter the interface

shown in Figure 4-52.

Figure 4-52 Modify cell system information

Reference:

8.4.3 System Information in M900/M1800 Base Station Controller Data Configuration

Reference – Initial Configuration 

Page 184: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 184/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-40

5) In Figure 4-50, select each cell and click <Modify BA1 and BA2 Table> to enter the

interface shown in Figure 4-53.

Figure 4-53 Modify BA1 and BA2 table

 All the BA1 and BA2 tables are automatically generated. To make a special modify,

please select "User Input" first.

6) After modification, click <OK>. Then click <Next> shown in Figure 4-50. Then click

<Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration, i.e., the dataof modified cell system message. See Figure 4-54.

Figure 4-54 Command list for dynamic configuration

IV. Verification

1) View the host data, and the modified parameters should be found correct.

Page 185: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 185/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-41

2) Through tracing Abis interface message, issued system message can be viewed.

Check the content of each system message to see whether all system message

parameters are correctly modified.

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:

[Cell Allocation table], [BA1(BCCH) table], [BA2(SACCH) table], [System information table], [BSC Cell

table], [Cell configuration table].

4.13 Modify Cell's Broadcast DRX Property

I. Function

This function supports the dynamic modification to the Cell Broadcast Service DRX

property of cell.

II. Preparation

None.

III. Procedure

1) Select the [Cell/Modify Cell's Broadcast DRX Property], the [Modify Cell's

Broadcast DRX Property] interface will pop up. Select the cell to be modified in it as

shown in Figure 4-55.

Figure 4-55 Select cell

Page 186: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 186/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-42

2) Click <Next> to enter the interface shown in Figure 4-56.

Figure 4-56 Modify DRX Function

3) Select each cell and modify [Support DRX Mode]. After the modification, click

<Next> to continue.

4) Click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration, i.e.,

the data of modified cell support DRX property. See Figure 4-57.

Figure 4-57 Command list for dynamic configuration

IV. Verification

View the data in the host, the parameter modified should be correct.

Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run BSC Data Management System to

check the [Cell/Cell Configuration Table], "Support DRX mode" is correctly configured.

Page 187: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 187/283

Page 188: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 188/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-44

Figure 4-58 Select cell

2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-59.

Figure 4-59 Modify cell install status

3) Select the cell listed in [Current Cell], modify its install status and then click <Next>

to continue.

4) Click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration of the

cell install status. See Figure 4-60.

Page 189: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 189/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-45

Figure 4-60 Command list during dynamic configuration

IV. Verification

1) Check the corresponding site on the Site Maintenance System. If the status

"installed" of a cell has been modified as "not installed" successfully, this cell

disappears in the cell list of the site.

2) If the status "not installed" of a cell has been modified as "installed" successfully,

the new cell appears in the cell list of the site.

3) Check the channel status of the newly added cell. Calls can be made in the newlyadded cells.

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:

[BSC Cell table], [Cell module information table], [Site slot description table].

4.15 Modify Cell's Allocation Table (BA1 & BA2 Table)

I. Function

Online modify the available frequency of the cell, including adding or deleting cell

available  frequency. This function is also used to add main BCCH frequency of the

not-adjacent cell for network optimization and maintenance.

Page 190: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 190/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-46

Caution:

1) The data in BA1 table and BA2 table will be automatically refreshed by the system according to theBCCH frequencies of adjacent cells.

2) BA1 table and BA2 table can be configured manually, but be sure to select "User Input" in the [Cell

BA1 & BA2 Table] interface when saving data. If the data of BA1 & BA2 tables has to be modified later 

(e.g., modify cell available frequency and BCCH frequency of adjacent cells), they have to be modified

manually because system will not update the data automatically.

II. Preparation

The available frequencies used in the cell cannot be deleted. To delete them, please

implement 4.17 Modify TRX’s Property operation to release the frequencies used,

then implement 4.15 Modify Cell's Allocation Table (BA1 & BA2 Table) operation to

delete them.

III. Procedure

For example, add available frequency 607 and 610 to Site1-1 in BM1, and delete the

unused frequency 616

1) Select the [Cell/Modify Cell Allocation Table (BA1 & BA2 Table)], the [Modify Cell

 Allocation Table (BA1 & BA2 Table)] interface will pop up. Select Site1-1 in it as

shown in Figure 4-61.

Figure 4-61 Modify Cell Allocation Table(BA1 & BA2 Table)

2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-62.

Page 191: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 191/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-47

Figure 4-62 Modify Cell Allocation Table

3) Select Site1-1 and click <Modify Cell’s Available Frequency> to enter the interface

shown in Figure 4-63.

Figure 4-63 Select cell’s available frequency

Figure 4-63 shows the frequency frequencies in the Cell Allocation of the current cell..

Every pane indicates one frequency. The frequencies in the canary yellow panes

have been used in the cell, such as frequency 580, 581 and 598. The frequencies in

the yellow panes is not used in the cell but have been configured to the cell, such as

frequency 599, 616 and 617. Frequencies in the yellow panes can be released by

clicking the panes, but frequencies in the canary yellow panes cannot be released. .

In Figure 4-63, click the No. 607 and 610 panes to add the available frequencies to

the cell. Click the pane corresponding to No. 616 to delete the frequency.

4) After the modification, click <Next>. Then click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to

implement the dynamic configuration, i.e., the data of modified cell effective

frequencies. See Figure 4-64.

Page 192: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 192/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-48

Figure 4-64 Command list for dynamic configuration

IV. Verification

1) View the data in the host, to check the frequencies information in the host is

correct.

2) Use test MS to verify the modifying of frequencies.

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:[Cell Allocation table], [Carrier configuration table], [Frequency hopping table].

[BA1(BCCH) table], [BA2(SACCH) table].

4.16 Modify Double Timeslots Related Property

I. Function

This function is used to modify double timeslots related property of the cell, including

modifying "Cell Extension Type" as "Normal Cell", "Single Timeslot Extension Cell" or 

"Double Timeslot Extension Cell", and modifying "HW_IUO Property" as "Overlaid

Subcell", "Underlaid Subcell" or "None".

Caution:

The modification to double timeslots related property will cause the level-4 reset of the site, and the

level-3 reset of other sites connected to its BIE port.

Page 193: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 193/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-49

Note:

1) Double timeslots extension cell means the cell whose "Cell extension type" is "Double Timeslot

Extension Cell". Double timeslot TRX means that the TRX is located in the double timeslot extension celland the "HW_IUO Property" of the TRX is "Underlaid Subcell".

2) The main BCCH TRX of the double timeslots extension cell must be the double timeslot TRX.

3) The TRXs belonging to the same MA group must be of the same type when baseband frequency is

configured, i.e., double timeslots TRX and normal TRX should not belong to the same MA group.

4) All the odd channels of double timeslot TRX cannot be modified.

II. Preparation

None

III. Procedure

For example, modify Site0-2 in BM1 as double timeslots extension cell.

1) Select the [Cell/Modify Double Timeslots Related Property], the [Modify Double

Timeslots Related Property] interface will pop up. Select "Site0-1" in it as shown in

Figure 4-65.

Figure 4-65 Modify double timeslots related property

2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-66.

Page 194: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 194/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-50

Figure 4-66 Modify double timeslots related property (modify cell extension type)

Caution:

Values for [Cell Extension Type] cannot be shifted between "Normal Cell" and "Single Timeslot

Extension Cell". For the shift of values between the above two, implement 4.4 Modify Cell's Property

operation.

3) In Figure 4-66, select "Site0-1" in [Current Cell], and then select "Double Timeslots

Extension Cell" in [Cell Extension Type]. Click <Next>, the interface will pop up as

shown in Figure 4-67.

Figure 4-67 Modify double timeslots related property (modify cell extension type)

Page 195: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 195/283

Page 196: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 196/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-52

Property " of the two timeslots extension cells, please implement 4.16 Modify Double

Timeslots Related Property operation first.

II. Preparation

None.

III. Procedure

1) Select the [Cell/Modify TRX’s Property], the [Modify TRX’s Property] interface will

pop up. Select the cell of the TRX to be modified in it as shown in Figure 4-69.

Figure 4-69 Modify TRX’s property - select cell

2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-70.

Figure 4-70 Modify TRX’s property - select TRX

Page 197: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 197/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-53

3) Select the cell, and then select the TRXs whose properties are to be modified and

add them accordingly into the [TRX Needs Modify] list. Click <Modify TRX Property>,

the interface will pop up as shown in Figure 4-71.

Figure 4-71 Modify TRX property

Caution:

In this step, "TRX Priority" cannot be modified with this operation. To modify TRX priority, please first

implement operation described in 4.22 .

4) After property modification, click <OK> to enter the interface shown in Figure 4-72.

Then click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration of 

adding the modified data. See Figure 4-72.

Page 198: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 198/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-54

Figure 4-72 Command list for dynamic configuration

IV. Verification

Change in static power level of carrier can be viewed from the Site Maintenance

System.

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:

[Carrier configuration table], [Cell attribute table].

4.18 Modify DC Bias Voltage and RACH Min Access Level

I. Function

This function is used to modify the cell DC Bias Voltage and the RACH Minimum

 Access Level.

Caution:

Normally DC Bias Voltage threshold parameter needs no adjustment.

Page 199: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 199/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-55

II. Preparation

None.

III. Procedure

1) Select the [Cell/Modify DC bias Voltage and RACH Min Access Level], the [Modify

DC Bias Voltage and RACH Min Access Level] interface will pop up. Select the cell to

be modified in it as shown in Figure 4-73.

Figure 4-73 Select cell.

2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-74.

Figure 4-74 Modify RACH Minimum Access Level

3) Select each cell, and modify the RACH Minimum Access Level and DC Bias

Voltage threshold for the cell.

Page 200: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 200/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-56

4) Click <Next> to continue, and then click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to

implement the dynamic configuration of modifying cell DC Bias Voltage and RACH

Minimum Access Level. See Figure 4-75.

Figure 4-75 Command list for dynamic configuration

IV. Verification

Check whether modified data is correct through viewing the host data.

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:

[Carrier configuration table], [Cell attribute table].

4.19 Modify TRX’s Channel Type

I. Function

This function is used to online modify channel type.

Page 201: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 201/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-57

Caution:

1) All TRXs of all sites under one BSC BIE port can be selected for one modification of the TRX channeltype in the cell.

2) Modify the TRX channel type of the cell in 15:1 trunk mode may result in BTS reset due to timeslot

rearrangement at Abis interface.

3) Modifying the channel type of the main BCCH or modifying the type of other channels into main

BCCH will cause level-4 reset of the BTS.

4) Under 15:1 configuration mode of Abis interface, there has to be sufficient trunk circuits and Abis

timeslots to modify SDCCH as TCH.

5) The odd channels of double timeslots TRX cannot be modified due to the data configuration

constraints of double timeslots extension cells.

6) Can’t modify main BCCH channel in 900-1800 Cell.

7) SDCCH channel must compatible with main BCCH channel.

8)PDCH channel and BCH channel must be in same frequency section with main BCCH channel in 900-

1800 cell.

II. Preparation

Block the channel to be modified in the Site Maintenance System.

III. Procedure

1) Select the [Cell/Modify TRX’s Channel Type], the [Modify TRX’s Channel Type]

interface will pop up, as shown in Figure 4-76.

Figure 4-76 Select BIE

Page 202: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 202/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-58

2) Select the BIE under which the TRXs will be modified, and click <Next> to enter the

interface as shown in Figure 4-77.

Figure 4-77 Select BIE port

3)Select the BIE port under which the TRXs will be modified, and click <Next> to

enter the interface shown in Figure 4-78.

Figure 4-78 Select cell and TRX

4) Select the TRX whose channel type is to be modified, and click <Modify Channel

Type> to enter the interface shown in Figure 4-79.

Page 203: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 203/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-59

Figure 4-79 Configure channel property

Reference:

“(b) Modify TRX’s Channel Type" in "(2) Modify Cell’s FH Property" in "8.3.3 Modify

Cell’s FH Property" in M900/M1800 Base Station Controller Data Configuration

Reference – Initial Configuration 

5) After the modification, click <Next> in Figure 4-78 to continue. Then click <Start

Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration of modifying channel

type. See Figure 4-80.

Figure 4-80 Command list for dynamic configuration

Page 204: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 204/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-60

IV. Verification

Check whether the information of channel type is corrected at the Site Maintenance

System.

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:

[Radio channel config. table], [Frequency hopping table], [System information table], [Site BIE trunk

mode descr. table], [BA1(BCCH) table], [BA2(SACCH) table].

4.20 Modify TRX's Frequency

I. Function

This function is used to modify the frequency of a TRX. Usually, this is applied in

network optimization and BTS capacity expansion. This operation can also be used to

add available frequency to the cell.

Caution:

1) Modification to the BCCH frequency will cause the initialization of the cell.

2) TRX frequency must be compatible TRX’s type.

3) TRX frequency must be compatible TRX’s channels.

II. Preparation

Before frequency modification for the TRX, block this TRX through the Site

Maintenance System.

III. Procedure

1) Select the [Cell/Modify TRX's Frequency], the [Modify TRX's Frequency] interface

will pop up. Select the cell to which the TRX to be modified in it as shown in

Figure 4-81.

Page 205: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 205/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-61

Figure 4-81 Select cell

2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-82.

Figure 4-82 Modify TRX frequency

3) Select each cell, and add the TRX whose frequency is to be modified, to the [TRX

needs modify] list. Then select each TRX in the list and click <Add Cell Effective

Freq.> to enter the interface shown in Figure 4-83.

Page 206: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 206/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-62

Figure 4-83 Select cell available TRX frequency

In the interface shown in Figure 4-82, select the TRX in the [TRX needs modify] list.

 And then click <Modify TRX Freq.> to enter the interface shown in Figure 4-84.

Figure 4-84 Modify TRX property

4) After modification, click <Next>. And then click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to

implement the GPMU data configuration of modifying TRX frequency. See

Figure 4-85.

Page 207: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 207/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-63

Figure 4-85  Command list for dynamic configuration

IV. Verification

1) Check the frequency and the channel status of the corresponding TRX on the

Site Maintenance System.

2) Check the frequencies of the corresponding cell with test MS and do call test.

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:[Carrier configuration table], [Frequency hopping table], [BA1(BCCH) table], [BA2(SACCH) table], [Cell

 Allocation table].

4.21 Modify GPRS Function

I. Function

This function is used to online modify GPRS function of the cell.

II. Preparation

None.

III. Procedure

1) Select the [Cell/Modify GPRS Function], the [Modify GPRS Function] interface will

pop up. Select the cell to be modified in it as shown in Figure 4-86.

Page 208: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 208/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-64

Figure 4-86 Modify GPRS function - select cell

2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-87.

Figure 4-87 Modify GPRS function

3) In Figure 4-87, select the cell and then modify its GPRS property as "Not Support

GPRS" or "Support GPRS".

4) Click <Next>. Then click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic

configuration of modifying GPRS property to GPMU. See Figure 4-88.

Page 209: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 209/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-65

Figure 4-88 Command list for dynamic configuration

IV. Verification

Check the data in the host by viewing the host data.

Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run BSC Data Management System to

check the [Local-office/BSC Cell Table].

4.22 Modify TRX Priority

I. Function

This function is used to online modify the priority of TRX. Only one cell can be

selected for one modification.

II. Preparation

None.

III. Procedure

1) Select the [Cell/Modify TRX Priority], the [Modify TRX Priority] interface will pop up.

Select the cell to be modified in it as shown in Figure 4-89.

Page 210: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 210/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-66

Figure 4-89 Select cell

2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-90.

Figure 4-90 Modify TRX’s priority

3) In Figure 4-90, select the TRX to be modified, then click <Modify TRX Priority

Level> to modify its priority level.

4) After the modification, click <Next>. Then click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to

implement the dynamic configuration of modifying TRX’s priority. See Figure 4-91.

Page 211: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 211/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-67

Figure 4-91 Command list for dynamic configuration

IV. Verification

Check the data in the host by viewing the host data.

Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run BSC Data Management System to

check the [Site/Carrier Configuration Table] to check the [Carrier configuration table].

4.23 External Cell

4.23.1 Add External Cell

I. Function

This function is used to add new external cells for BSC. The new external cells are

not adjacent with any of BSC cells. If need to configure adjacent cells for new external

cells, please select the [Cell]/[Modify Cell Handover Parameter] or [Cell]/[External

Cell]/[Modify] to complete the operation, after the operation of adding external cell.

Caution:

 Adding external cell description data involves data of MSC and other BSCs. Therefore it is necessary to

guarantee the consistency of data.

Page 212: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 212/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-68

II. Preparation

None.

III. Procedure

1) Select the [Cell/External Cell/Add], the [Add External Cell] interface will pop up as

shown in Figure 4-92.

Figure 4-92 Select external cell

Caution:

Only adding new external cell will <Delete External Cell> or <Modify External Cell> is allowed.

2) Click <Add External Cell> to add external cell. See Figure 4-93.

Page 213: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 213/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-69

Figure 4-93 Modify external cell property

Reference:

"8.3.5 Add External Cell" in M900/M1800 Base Station Controller Data Configuration

Reference – Initial Configuration 

Reference:

 Adjacent Cell Relation Table in M900/M1800 Base Station Controller Data

Configuration Reference – Network Planning Parameters 

3) After configuration, click <Next>. And then click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to

implement the dynamic configuration of adding external cells. See Figure 4-94.

Figure 4-94 Command list for dynamic configuration

IV. Verification

1) Check the data in the host.

Page 214: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 214/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-70

2) Check traffic statistics result of HO from Traffic Statistics System.

3) Do call and handover test with the test MS.

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:

[Cell module information table], [Handover control table], [GSM0508 handover table], [Load handover 

table], [Intra-cell cont. HO ctrl. table], [Penalty table], [Filter table], [Emergency handover table],

[Adjacent Cell Relation table], [Normal handover table], [BA1(BCCH) table], [BA2(SACCH) table],

[External cell description table], [Fast-moving handover table], [Concentric cell handover table].

4.23.2 Delete External Cell

I. Function

This function is used to delete a designated external cell.

II. Preparation

None.

III. Procedure

1) Select the [Cell/External Cell/Delete], the [Delete External Cell] interface will pop

up. Select the external cell to be deleted in it as shown in Figure 4-95.

Figure 4-95 Select external cell

Page 215: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 215/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-71

2) Click <Next> to continue. And then click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to

implement the dynamic configuration of deleting the external cell. See Figure 4-96.

Figure 4-96 Command list for dynamic configuration

IV. Verification

Check the external cell data in the host by viewing the host data.

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:

[Cell module information table], [Handover control table], [GSM0508 handover table], [Load handover 

table], [Intra-cell cont. HO ctrl. table], [Penalty table], [Filter table], [Emergency handover table],

[Adjacent Cell Relation table], [Normal handover table], [BA1(BCCH) table], [BA2(SACCH) table],

[External cell description table], [Fast-moving handover table], [Concentric cell handover table].

4.23.3 Modify External Cell

I. Function

This function is used to add/delete adjacent cells for a cell designated, and configure

handover parameters and external cell property parameters.

II. Preparation

None.

Page 216: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 216/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-72

III. Procedure

1) Select the [Cell/External Cell/Modify], the [Modify External Cell’s Property] interface

will pop up. Select the external cell whose property is to be modified in it as shown inFigure 4-97.

Figure 4-97 Select external cell

2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-98.

Figure 4-98 Modify external cell adjacent relationship

3) Modify the adjacent relationship. It is allowed to configure the relationship of the

new adjacent cell of this external cell or to delete the original adjacent cell. Then click

<Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-99.

Page 217: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 217/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-73

Figure 4-99 External cell adjacent relationship

4) Modify the property of external cell, including HO parameter of all adjacent cells,

property of external cell, etc. After that, click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to modify

external cell property.

Figure 4-100 Command list for dynamic configuration

IV. Verification

1) Check the external cell data in the host by viewing the host data.

2) Do call and handover test with the test MS.

3) Check the traffic statistics result of HO from the Traffic statistics System.

Page 218: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 218/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-74

Note:

Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:

[Handover control table], [GSM0508 handover table], [Load handover table], [Intra-cell cont. HO ctrl.table], [Penalty table], [Filter table], [Emergency handover table], [Adjacent Cell Relation table], [Normal

handover table], [BA1(BCCH) table], [BA2(SACCH) table], [External cell description table], [Fast-moving

handover table], [Concentric cell handover table].

4.24 Batch Modify Cell's Network Parameter 

I. Function

This function is used to modify the cell parameters in batch processing. This function

can be applied to reduce the amount of work involved in modifying cell parameters

and keep the data consistency in modification.

Caution:

1) Only the cell parameters with same type of command word can be selected each time.2) At most 10 cells can be selected for one dynamic batch modification.

II. Preparation

None.

III. Procedure

1) Select the [Cell/Batch Modify Cell's Network Parameter], the [Batch Modify Cell's

Network Parameter] interface will pop up. Select the cell to be modified in it as shown

in Figure 4-101.

Page 219: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 219/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-75

Figure 4-101 Select cell

2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-102, then select the cell

parameters to be modified.

Figure 4-102 Select the cell parameter to be modified

3) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-103.

Page 220: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 220/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-76

Figure 4-103 Modify cell parameter 

In the figure above, the item to be edited on the right will change as the cell parameter 

selected currently varies. For example, if the cell parameter "Timed transmission" is

selected in the figure above, then the change is shown in Figure 4-104.

Figure 4-104 Select timed transmission parameter 

If the value of the item on the right has not been modified, the system will modify

automatically the cell parameters of all the cells selected in default value.

4) By clicking the cell parameters in the list box of selected parameters to check

whether they have been modified, and then click <Next> to continue. Click <Start

Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration of batch modifying

cell parameters. See Figure 4-105.

Page 221: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 221/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-77

Figure 4-105 Command list for dynamic configuration

Note:

In the figure above, the Dynamical configuration commands displayed in the list box changes as the cell

parameter type currently selected varies.

4.25 Configure RSL Flow Control Parameter 

I. Function

This function is used to modify RSL flow control parameters of TRX.

II. Preparation

None.

III. Procedure

1) Select the [Cell/Config RSL Flow Ctrl Param], the [Config RSL Flow Ctrl Param]

interface will pop up, as shown in Figure 4-106.

Page 222: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 222/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-78

Figure 4-106 Select TRXs

2) Select the TRXs to be modified, and click <Config Flow Ctrl Param> to enter the

interface as shown in Figure 4-107.

Figure 4-107 Modify RSL flow control parameters of TRX

3) After modification, click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-108.

Then click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration of 

modifying RSL flow control parameters of TRX.

Page 223: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 223/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data

 

4-79

Figure 4-108 Command list for dynamic configuration

Page 224: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 224/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix A Abbreviations

 

 A-1

Appendix A Abbreviations

A  AM/CM Administration Module/Communication ModuleB BA BCCH AllocationBAM Back Administration ModuleBCC BTS Color CodeBCCH Broadcast Control CHannelBCH Broadcast channel (transport channel)BIE Base Station Interface EquipmentBITS Building Integrated Timing SupplyBM Basic ModuleBS Base StationBS1 Abis InterfaceBSC Base Station Controller BSMU Base Station Interface UnitBSS Base Station SubsystemBTS Base Transceiver StationC CA Cell AllocationCBCH Cell Broadcast CHannelCC Country CodeCCCH Common Control ChannelCCS Common Channel SignalingCDU Combiner and Divider UnitCGI Cell Global IdentificationCIC Circuit Identification CodeCRC Cyclic Redundancy Check

CS-1 Code Scheme-1CS-2 Code Scheme-2CS-3 Code Scheme-3CS-4 Code Scheme-4CTN Central Switching Network BoardD DBF Database FileDPC Destination (Signaling) Point CodeDRX Discontinuous ReceptionDTX Discontinuous TransmissionE E3M E3 Sub-Multiplexer EAC External Alarm CollectionECSC Early Classmark Sending Control

EDU Enhanced Duplexer UnitEFR Enhanced full rate speech codeEST EstablishmentF FACCH Fast Associated Control ChannelFBC Photoelectric Conversion BoardFBI Optical Fiber Interface BoardFPU Frame Processing UnitFTC Full Rate Transcoder FTP File Transfer ProtocolFUL Radio Signaling LinkG GALM Alarm boardGCKS Clock sourceGCTN Central switching Network board

GEMA Emergency Action board

Page 225: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 225/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix A Abbreviations

 

 A-2

GFBI Fiber Interface boardGLAP LAPD Protocol Process boardGMC2 Inter-Module Communication boardGMCC Module Communication and Control boardGMEM Memory board

GMPU Main Process UnitGNET Switching Network boardGNOD Node Communication BoardGOPT Local Optical Interface BoardGPRS General Packet Radio ServiceGPS Global Position SystemGSM Global System for Mobile CommunicationsGSNT GSM Signaling Switching Network BoardH HDLC High-level Data Link Control

HO Handover 

HPA High magnification Power Amplifier boardHSN Hopping Sequence Number HW HighwayI ID IDentification/IDentityIND IndicationIOMU iSite Operation and Maintenance UnitIP Internet ProtocolL LAPD Link Access Protocol on the D-channelLPN7 Common Channel Signaling Processing BoardM MA Mobile AllocationMAIO Mobile Allocation Index OffsetMCC Mobile Country CodeMCK Main Clock boardMFU Microcell Frame UnitMMU Multiplication and Management Unit

MNC Mobile Network CodeMS Mobile StationMSC Mobile Switching Center MSM MSC Subrate channel Multiplexer MTP Message Transfer PartN NCC Network Color CodeNSS Network SubSystemO OM Opration and MaintenanceOMC Operation and Maintenance Center OML Operation and Maintenance LinkOMU Operation and Maintenance UnitOPC Originating Point Code

P Pb Pb InterfacePBCCH Packet Broadcast Control ChannelPBGT Power BudgetPBU Power Boost UnitPCCCH Packet Common Control ChannelPCIC Packet Circuit Identity CodePCM Pulse-Code ModulationPCU Packet Control UnitPDH Plesiochronous Digital HierarchyPDTCH Packet Data Traffic ChannelPLMN Public Land Mobile NetworkPMU Power and Environment Monitoring UnitPSU Power Supply UnitPWC Secondary Power Supply BoardR 

Page 226: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 226/283

Page 227: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 227/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-1

Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B.1 BSC Data

BSC data refers to the data related the rack, frame, board and resource allocation,

etc. It is used to describe the physical feature of BSC.

BSC is made up of hardware system and software system. Before they are put into

operation, they are independent of each other. For BSC to work normally, the

software system must exercise effective control over the hardware.

Software system masters the hardware configuration and the running character of 

each hardware unit through BSC data configuration. Hardware system run normally

and supplies all kinds of call services with the controlling of software system.

B.1.1 Configuration Principles and Flow

BSC data configuration should follow the principle "from global to local". That means,

data configuration starts from configuration for the whole system, and then becomes

more specific gradually until it finally resorts to the configuration for each board. 

The BSC data configuration consists of two large parts: AM/CM data configuration

and BM data configuration. Each of them follows the configuration sequence of 

module→rack→frame→board→system resources, as shown in Figure B-1.

Module Data

Frame Data

Board Data

System Resources Data

 

Figure B-1 BSC data configuration flow

Page 228: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 228/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-2

I. Module data configuration

Module data configuration refers to the data description of all the modules of BSC,

including module type, working status, inter-module communication and BAM

communication of AM/CM and every BM.

II. Frame and board data configuration

Frame and board data configuration involves such information as the type, location

and numbering of each hardware unit in the system.

III. System resource allocation

System resource allocation refers to the allocation of system internal resources,

including main control resources (GNOD), network resources (HW) and inter-module

communication resources (optical path and link), etc.

The software system of BSC adopts a fully-distributed control method, i.e., almost

every board carries relevant software to control its own hardware. But as a whole,

both hardware and software are coordinated and controlled by the central software.

To achieve this, the communications between the central software and distributed

software and that between distributed software are required. System resources are

used to meet the requirement of this internal communication.

Besides, there are also some public data to be configured, mainly the public

parameters used by some internal software as well as some parameters required for 

hardware working under specific environment.

B.1.2 Numbering Principle

Each hardware unit is given a serial number for easy identification by the software

system. Together with other information, this serial number is sent to the software

system to effectively control the hardware system. 

Serial numbers can also help maintenance engineers to perform routine maintenance

and locate the fault quickly and easily.

The hardware unit numbering includes the numbering of modules, racks, frames,

slots and boards. The principles of numbering are described as follows:

I. Numbering of modules

Modules are numbered sequentially in the whole BSC. In other words, the number of 

a module in a BSC must be unique and there should be no other module that has the

same module number with it in the whole BSC system. Module number is the number 

of modules (AM/CM and BM) configured in the system. 

Page 229: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 229/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-3

 AM/CM is fixedly numbered as Module0 and the numbering of BMs begins from 1 to 8,

as one AM/CM can have maximum of 8 BMs, Single-module BSC contains only one

BM, so the module number of BM is fixed as 1. See Figure B-2.

 AM/CM

BM1 BM2 BM8

0

1 2 8

 

Figure B-2 Module numbering in the multi -module BSC

II. Numbering of racks

The same as the numbering of modules, racks are also numbered sequentially in the

whole BSC system.

For a multi-module BSC, the rack where the AM/CM is located is fixedly numbered as

Rack 0 and the racks of BMs are numbered sequentially from 1. In single-module

BSC, the rack of the BM is numbered as 1.

III. Numbering of frames

Frames are sequentially numbered within its module, i.e., frame number cannot be

repeated in a module, but the same frame number can exist in other modules.

Frames are fixedly numbered from 0 with the numbering sequence from bottom to top

and near to far. The frames are numbered from near to far means all the frames are

numbered in sequence from near to far according to the distance between the racks

where a frame is located and the main control rack in a muti-rack module. 

In the BSC, each rack is made up of 6 standard frames. The frames are numbered in

sequence from bottom to top as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5, as shown in Figure B-3. 

Page 230: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 230/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-4

 AM/CM BM1 BM2

Frame 0

Frame 1

Frame 2

Frame 3

Frame 4

Frame 5

Frame 0

Frame 1

Frame 2

Frame 3

Frame 4

Frame 5

Frame 0

Frame 1

Frame 2

Frame 3

Frame 4

Frame 5

 

Figure B-3 Diagram of frame numbering

IV. Numbering of slots

There are 26 slots in each frame, numbered in sequence from left to right as 0~25.

Usually a board occupies only one slot while some boards occupy two slots, e.g.

GMPU and GMEM. The boards occupying two slots are normally configured in

even-numbered slots.

V. Numbering of boards

Board numbering is very important. It not only determines whether the board can

work normally, but also impacts the numbering of SS7 and LAPD links as well as

trunk circuits.

The numbering of the boards follows the following principles:

z  The number of the board begins with 0.

z  Boards are numbered sequentially in one module, i.e., in the same module,

boards of the same type should not take the same number. For example, there

should be only one Number 1 GMPU in a module.

z  The boards of the same type are numbered sequentially in one module. For 

example, if there are 6 BIEs in a BM, then their board numbers should be in the

sequence of 0 to 5 from left to right.z  The boards whose slots are compatible to each other are numbered sequentially.

For example, in BM, the slots of GMEM, LPN7 and GLAP are compatible, so

they are regarded as of the same type and are numbered sequentially.

z  In the frames such as the main control frame, interface frame and clock frame,

the board number has a fixed correspondence with the slot number. Assume all

the slots are inserted with corresponding boards, i.e., under the full configuration

of the frame, number these boards in the way described above. You can get a

board number for each board in each slot. The board number for a certain board

in a certain slot is then fixed. This numbering way is applicable to GLAP, LPN7

and GMEM.

Page 231: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 231/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-5

z  In BM, FTC and BIE are numbered sequentially and the MSM board is numbered

separately.

z  The GALM in AM/CM is numbered permanently as 0 and the GALM in BM is

numbered permanently as 1.

B.1.3 AM/CM Data Configuration

I. AM/CM composition

The standard configuration of AM/CM is shown in Figure B-4.

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 88 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 189 20 21 22 23 24 2519

0 1

0101234567890

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 10 12 14

0 1

17 18 19 20 21 22 2316

24 26 28 30

BAM

0

1

2

3

4

5

P

W

CKC

S

G

KC

S

G

KC

S

P

W

C

P

W

C

P

W

C

P

W

C

P

W

C

P

W

C

P

W

C

G

L A

M

G

CM

C

G

CM

C

G

CM

C

G

CM

C

G

CM

C

G

CM

C

G

CM

C

G

CM

C

G

CM

C

G

NS

T

G

NS

T

3E

M3E

M3E

M3E

M3E

M3E

M3E

M3E

M3E

M3E

M3E

M3E

M3E

M3E

M3E

M

G

BF

I

G

BF

I

G

BF

I

G

BF

I

G

BF

I

G

BF

I

G

BF

I

G

BF

I

G

TC

N

P

W

C

G

TC

N

G

CM

C

3E

M

 

Figure B-4 The standard configuration of AM/CM

In the above figure, Frame 0 is BAM, Frame 2 and 3 are the transmission interface

frames, Frame 4 is the communication control frame and Frame 5 is the clock frame.

Configuration description:

1) GFBI works in load sharing mode.

2) GMCC 0 and GMCC 1 are used for accessing BAM, GSNT, GCTN and GALM,

so they must be configured. Other GMCCs are used to access BM.

II. AM/CM optical path configuration The distribution of AM/CM optical paths is illustrated in Figure B-5.

Page 232: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 232/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-6

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 88 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 189 20 21 22 23 24 2519

0

1

4

5

6

7

6

7

4

5

2

3

2

3

0

1

8

9

12

13

14

15

14

15

12

13

10

11

10

11

8

9

24

25

28

29

30

31

30

31

28

29

26

27

26

27

24

25

16

17

20

21

22

23

22

23

20

21

18

19

18

19

16

17

 

Figure B-5  AM/CM interface frame optical path distribution 

The optical path number of FBC is fixedly determined by its slot. Each FBC has two

optical paths, the upper one is called X and the bottom one is called Y. The X opticalpaths of the two adjacent FBC boards are in active/standby relationship, so do the Y

optical paths of the two adjacent FBC boards. The optical paths between BM and

 AM/CM work in load-sharing mode. See Figure B-6. 

X

Y

X

Y

FBC

(2n)

FBC

(2n+2)

GOPT 0 GOPT 1

 

Figure B-6 Optical path distribution

In Figure B-6, n means the board number of FBC, 0<n<14.

III. The speech channel connection procedures in multi-module BSC

MSC←→FTC←→MSM←→E3M←→GCTN←→GFBI←→GOPT←→GNET←→BIE

Page 233: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 233/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-7

IV. SS7 transmission procedures in multi-module BSC

MSC←→FTC←→MSM←→E3M←→Transparent transmission

BIE←→GNET←→LPN7←→GMPU

V. Inter-BM communication

BM1: GMPU←→GMC2←→GOPT←→GFBI←→GMCCS

BM2: GMPU←→GMC2←→GOPT←→GFBI←→GMCCS

B.1.4 BM Data Configuration

Single module BSC is seldom being used, so only the BM data configuration of 

multi-module BSC is introduced here.

BM consists of 1 main control frame, 1 Base Station interface frame and 1~2 TCSM

unit frame.

I. Numbering of boards

Boards numbering and the full configuration of the frames will be described as follows

according to the numbering principles of boards as mentioned above.

1) Main control frame

The board configuration and numbering in the main control frame is shown in

Figure B-7.

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 88 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 189 20 21 22 23 24 2519

0 1 2 3 4 5 0 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 1

6 7 88 109 5 6 7 8 90 1 0 11

0

P

W

C

P

WC

P

W

C

P

WC

GNOD

GNOD

GNOD

GNOD

GNOD

GNOD

GEM A

GNOD

GMPU

GM

PU

GN

OD

GN

OD

GN

OD

GN

OD

GN

OD

GNET

GNET

GMEM

LPN7

LPN7

GL AP

GL

 AP

GL

 AP

GL

 AP

GL

 AP

GL

 AP

GMC2

GOPT

G ALM

GMC2

GOPT

 

Figure B-7 Board numbering in the main control frame

Base Station interface frame

The board configuration and numbering in the base station interface frame are shown

in Figure B-8.

Page 234: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 234/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-8

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 189 20 21 22 23 24 2519

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 88 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

P

WC

P

WC

B

IE

B

IE

B

IE

B

IE

B

IE

B

IE

B

IE

B

IE

B

IE

B

IE

B

IE

B

IE

B

IE

B

IE

B

IE

B

IE

B

IE

B

IE

B

IE

 

Figure B-8 Board numbering in the base station interface frame

BIEs are numbered from 0 sequentially according to the actual number of boards

configured and its numbering has no relationship with their slots.

The two adjacent BIEs constitute an active/standby group that is numbered from 0.

The 16 BIE constitutes one group by itself, numbered as 8.

2) TCSM unit The full configuration of TCSM unit is illustrated in Figure B-9.

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 189 20 21 22 23 24 25190 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

P

W

S

F

T

C

F

T

C

F

T

C

F

T

C

F

T

C

F

T

C

F

T

C

F

T

C

F

T

C

F

T

C

F

T

C

F

T

C

F

T

C

F

T

C

F

T

C

F

T

C

P

W

S

M

S

M

M

S

M

M

S

M

M

S

M

 

Figure B-9 The full configuration of TCSM unit

FTCs are numbered according to the configuration status of BIEs and the following

principles.

FTC number = Number of HWs occupied by BIE.

For example, configure 2 BIE active/standby groups, each group occupies 8 HWs and

each FTC occupies 1 HW. In this case, the starting number of the FTC board = (8 % 

2)/1 = 16 and the subsequent FTC can be numbered sequentially from 16.

The MSMs are numbered from 0 sequentially in BM.

Note:

For the number of occupied HWs, see II. Network Resource Allocation.

Page 235: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 235/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-9

II. Network Resource Allocation

The BSC system resources mainly include network resources and control resources.

Network resources are HW resources provided by the switching network board(GNET), including 128 HWs, each of which provides 32 timeslots.

The boards that occupy network resources are BIE equipment, signaling processing

board and inter-module circuit.

Each active/standby BIE group is allocated with 4 or 8 HWs depending on its

networking mode. And the number of HWs occupied by a group depends on the

actual cable distribution. FTC and MSM do not occupy HW resources in the system.

Of 128 HWs, 64 HWs are allocated permanently for system internal usage. The

signaling processing units LPN7, GLAP and GMEM occupy Number 53 to 62 HWs,as shown in Figure B-10. The numbers of HWs occupied by other boards are

determined by the slots where they are located. 

15 16 17 18 2019

53 54 55 56

62 57 58 59 60

61

G

M

E

M

L

P

N

7

L

P

N

7

GL

 A

P

GL

 A

P

GL

 A

P

GL

 A

P

G

L

 A

P

G

L

 A

P

 

Figure B-10 HW allocation for signaling processing units

Number 48 HW and Number  71 are occupied permanently for fixed use and GALM

occupies Number  49 HW.

Several HWs constitute a HW group. For instance, the 8 HWs allocated to a BIE

active/standby group constitute a HW group. HW group numbers are presented in the

[Slot Description Table]. The corresponding relationship between HW group

numbers and HW numbers is given in the [HW Description Table].

III. Control Resource Allocation

Control resources refer to GNOD that is used by GMPU to control circuit boards such

as BIE. In BM, BIE communicates with GMPU via GNOD.

Page 236: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 236/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-10

The master node (NOD) is provided by GNOD. At most 11 GNODs can be configured

in a BM module. Each GNOD can provide 4 master nodes, i.e., each BM can provide

a maximum of 44 master nodes for communication with boards such as BIE, to

control their operations.

In BSC system, although the communication of GMEM, LPN7 and GLAP with GMPU

is achieved by means of memory switching, BSC takes each memory switching area

as a virtual master node. The virtual master nodes occupy node numbers ranging

from 44 to 53. For the distribution of master nodes, see Figure B-11.

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 88 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 189 20 21 22 23 24 2519

0 1 2 3 4 5

6 7 88 109

0

1

23

4

5

67

8

9

1011

12

13

1415

16

17

1819

20

21

2223

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44 45 46 47

49 50 51 52

48

53

 

Figure B-11 Node resources distribution

One active/standby group of BIE shares one master node, whose number is

determined by physical cable distribution.

The maintenance of FTC and MSC is done through a timeslot in E1, so there is no

need to allocate nodes to them.

1) Master node description

For the frame length of read/write mailbox and the length of commands sent and

reported, it is advisable to refer to the fixed configuration as shown in Table B-1.

Table B-1 Description of master node

Board Type Frame Length of Read/Write Mailbox Length of Commands Reported or Sent

BIE 10 9

GLAP and LPN7 80 64

2) Slave node number 

GMPU visits the equipment via the master node on GNOD. So the equipment visited

by GMPU can also be called as slave node. Communication between the master 

nodes and slave nodes is implemented via serial ports. While the master nodes

communicates with the GMPU via the mailbox, for the master nodes collect

voluminous information of all its slave nodes. Each master node consists of several

Page 237: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 237/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-11

slave nodes and each slave node is allocated with a serial number called slave node

number. The slave node number of LPN7 and GLAP is 0 and the slave node number 

of BIE is the same as its board number. The number of the slave nodes in TCSM unit

is illustrated in Figure B-12. 

12 3 4 5

F

T

C

F

T

C

F

T

C

F

T

C

M

S

M

 

Figure B-12 Number of slave nodes in TCSM unit

B.2 Clock Data Configuration

The BSC system adopts stratum-3 clock system. The working principle of the clock

system in multi-module BSC is shown in Figure B-13.

GOPT

GNET

BIE BIE

GMPU GMC2

BM

GCTN

Clcokframe

GSNT

GMCC

MCP

GALM

GFBI AM/CM

MSC reference source

BITS reference source

GPS reference source

 

Figure B-13 The working principle of the clock system in multi-module BSC

The working principle of the clock system in single-module BSC is shown in

Figure B-14.

Page 238: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 238/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-12

Clock Frame

MSC reference source

BITS reference source

GNET

BIE BIE

GMPU GMC2

GPS reference source

 

Figure B-14 The working principle of the clock system in single-module BSC

For the multi-module BSC, what connects the MSC is E3M located at the AM/CM

transmission interface frame. E3M extracts the 8kHz clock information from the

superior MSC transmission line, and transmits it to the 8K-in port on the motherboard

of the clock frame through the clock cables on the motherboard (C821CKB).

C821CKB also provides 2Mbit/s and 2MHz input ports used to connect the GPS and

BITS. The BSC usually extracts the 8kHz signal from the signals of the superior MSC,

and it seldom extracts clock information of higher precision directly from the GPS and

BITS.

The clock frame is composed of GCKS and PWC. GCKS extracts the 8kHz signal

(differential signal) from the trunk or 2Mbit/s and 2MHz signals from other equipment

(like the BITS) as its reference clock source.

Each reference clock source has two optional signals. The major function of GCKS is

to capture and trace the reference clock source so that the clock signals output from

GCKS have the same frequency and phase features as the reference clock source.

GCKS provides the clock signals for the BSC, and 2 8kHz and 2 standard 2Mbit/s and

2MHz reference sources, which can also meet the requirement of the stratum-2 A and

stratum-3 clocks.

The clock frame is equipped on AM/CM in a multi-module BSC system, and the BM

obtains the clock synchronization information provided by the clock frame on the

 AM/CM through the inter-module optical paths.

B.3 Trunk and Signaling on the A-interface

 A-interface is the communication interface between NSS and BSS, that is, the

interconnecting interface between MSC and BSC. Its physical link, which is based on

standard 2.048Mbit/s PCM digital transmission, transmits information concerning

Page 239: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 239/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-13

mobile station management, BTS management, mobility management and

connection management.

There are two kinds of trunk circuits on the A-interface:

z   A-interface traffic link (voice)

z   A-interface signaling link (SS7 link)

 As the service information at the NSS side and BSS side is processed at different

rates, code conversion and rate adaptation (TRAU, abbreviated as FTC) are required

to convert the 16kbit/s service signals at the BSS side into 64kbit/s signals at the NSS

side when voice and data services are transmitted between NSS and BSS. Normally

FTC is placed at MSC side to achieve multiplexing of the 16kbit/s signals between

NSS and BSS so that the number of E1s on the A-interface can be reduced. E3M and

MSM are respectively used for BSC and MSC to complete multiplexing and

de-multiplexing function. For the signal flow, see Figure B-15.

 A TCSM unit contains 1 MSM and 4 FTCs.

In a multi-module BSC, AM/CM manages E3M, through which the BM manages

TCSM unit. One E3M can be connected to 4 TCSM units at most. The transparent

transmission BIE accomplishes the transparent transmission of signaling on

 A-interface.

Each E3M provides 5 E1 ports, the first 4 of which can interconnect with 4 TCSM

units and the fifth of which is connected to the transparent transmission BIE to

accomplish the transparent transmission of SS7 (the processing of SS7 is performed

in the BM). One TCSM unit can convert the 64kbit/s signals from the MSC side after 

FTC code conversion, and then multiplex the 4 E1s to 1 E1 via MSM for transmission.

E3M

TCSM

To MSC

To TCSM

To Transparent Transm ission

BIE(SS7 Signaling)

To BM

 A In terface

 Asu b In te rface

 

Figure B-15  A-interface signal flow

 As shown in the Figure B-15, the interface between E3M and TCSM is called as Asub

Interface and that between the TCSM unit and MSC is called as A-interface.

If the No. 16 timeslot is used to transfer signaling at E1, the timeslot allocation at

 Asub interface and A-interface see respectively in Table B-2, Table B-3.

Page 240: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 240/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-14

Table B-2 Timeslot allocation at A-interface

bit

TS0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

0 TS01 ~ 15 15 full rate channels

16 SS7 (Signaling System Number 7)

17 ~ 31 15 full rate channels

Table B-3 Timeslot allocation at Asub interface

bit

TS0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

0 TS0

1 ~ 15 A1 ~ A15 B1 ~ B15 C1 ~ C15 D1 ~ D15

16 SS7

17 ~ 31 A17 ~ A31 B17 ~ B31 C17 ~ C31 D17 ~ D31

Note:

The A-interface data configuration described in this chapter includes the data configuration of both Asub

and A-interface.

B.4 BTS Networking

BSC and BTS are connected through the Base station Interface Equipment (BIE). 

BIE accomplishes functions of multiplexing/de-multiplexing, level conversion from HW

to E1 and extraction of synchronization clocks, etc.

BTS networking modes include star networking, chain networking and tree

networking.

B.4.1 Principle of Numbering

I. Numbering of sites

The sites in a BM are numbered sequentially from 0 to 63.

Page 241: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 241/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-15

II. Numbering of TRXs

The TRXs in a site are numbered sequentially from 0 to 35. Its slot determines the

number of TRXs.

III. Numbering of channels

The physical channels of a TRX are numbered sequentially from 0 to 7.

IV. Numbering of trunk groups

Trunk group is the set of a cluster of connatural trunk circuits. The trunks connected

to BIE constitute one group and those connected to FTC constitute another group.

The trunk groups in an office are numbered sequentially. For example, the circuits

from BSC to MSC via FTC are grouped as group 0, while the trunk circuits from BSC

to BTS and to transparent transmission BIE are grouped as group 1.

Note:

Though the trunk circuits at Abis interface are connected to different BTSs, they are still regarded

belonging to the same trunk group.

V. Numbering of trunk circuits

Trunk circuits refer to all HW timeslots allocated by GNET, and are numbered

sequentially in a BM. Timeslot number on BS1 Interface refer to all HW timeslots

allocated to a BIE group, are numbered sequentially.

The calculation formula is given as follows:

The initial trunk circuit number of the BIE active/standby group = Number the

active/standby group% 256 (8 HWs, each of which provides 32 time slots)

For example, the trunk circuit Number of active/standby group 0 is 0~255, that of 

active/standby group 1 is 256 ~ 511, and that of active/standby group 2 is 512~767

etc.

Note:

 Active/standby group 7 and 8 respectively occupies 4 HWs, so they should be numbered as exceptions.

Page 242: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 242/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-16

B.4.2 Introduction to BIE

I. Functions

In GSM system, BIE is adopted to connect BSC with BTS, as shown in Figure B-16.

TMU BIE

AbisInterface

BS Interface

E1 HW

GNET

BTS BSC

 

Figure B-16 BIE in GSM system

Each BIE can provide 6 E1 ports at the maximum and at BTS side each TMU can

provide at most 4 E1 ports (If it is BTS20, at most 4 E1 ports can be provided by BIE

or BSMU).

1) BTS312 can be configured with 3 cabinet groups at the maximum, among which, 

z  1 main cabinet group. In this main cabinet group, 1 master cabinet (including 2

TMUs) and 1 slave cabinet (no TMU) are configured.

z  2 extension cabinet group. In each extension cabinet group, 1 master cabinet

(including 1 TMU) and 1 slave cabinet (no TMU) are configured.

2) BTS30 can be configured with 3 cabinet groups at the maximum, among which, 

z  1 main cabinet group. In this main cabinet group, 1 master cabinet (including 2

TMUs) and 2 slave cabinet (no TMU) are configured.

z  2 extension cabinet group. In each extension cabinet group, 1 master cabinet

(including 1 TMU) and 2 slave cabinet (no TMU) are configured.

In BM, the voice and signaling information from GNET are sent to BIE through BS

interface (HW). After multiplexing, they are sent to corresponding BTS via Abis

interface (E1). Information from BTS are sent to GNET after de-multiplexing. SeeFigure B-17. Each BIE group can support 8 HWs at the maximum, among which 4

HWs form one group. The trunk circuits are numbered continuously and sequentially

from 0 to 127.

Page 243: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 243/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-17

B

I

E

BS1

E1HW

 Abis

 

Figure B-17 BIE multiplexing/de-multiplexing

II. BIE trunk mode

Table B-4 BIE trunk mode

BIE trunk mode Networkingmode supported

Maximum number of sites (S) andTRXs (T) supported at each port

BIE typesupported

6E1 port*2TRX/port Star networking 1S-2TGM32BIE0GM32BIE1 

4E1 port*6TRX/port Star networking 1S-6TGM32BIE0GM32BIE1 

2E1port*64K LAPD/portChain networkingTree networking

1S-10T, 4S-9T, 7S-8T GM32BIE0 

2E1port*32KLAPD multiplexmode/port

Chain networkingTree networking

1S-12T, 5S-10T GM32BIE0 

2E1port*multiplex/portChain networkingTree networking

1S-15T(12SI), 2S-15T(16SI, BTS20don't support), 2S-14T(4SI),4S-14T(8SI, BTS20 don't support),4S-13T, 5S-13T(BTS20 don'tsupport)

GM32BIE1 

6E1port (support 16K)Chain networkingand treenetworking

2S-2T GM32BIE1

4E1port (supports 16K)Chain networkingand treenetworking

7S-7T GM32BIE1

6E1port*2TRX/port (supportlink)

Tree networking 2S-2TGM32BIE0GM32BIE1 

4E1port*6TRX/port (supportlink)

Tree networking 6S-6TGM32BIE0GM32BIE1 

Sim 12:1Chain networkingand tree

networking

1S-12T, 5S-10T GM32BIE1 

Sim10:1Chain networkingand treenetworking

1S-10T, 4S-9T, 7S-8T GM32BIE1 

6 E1 Port half rate topologyChain networkingTree networkging

7S-15T GM34BIE

Full rate ring topology Ring 5S-15T GM34BIEHalf rate ring topology Ring 5S-15T GM34BIE

Page 244: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 244/283

Page 245: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 245/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-19

8 HWs correspond to 4 E1 ports, among which, HW0 ~HW3 are multiplexed to

port0~port1 and HW4~HW7 are multiplexed to port2~port3. Signaling timeslots are

distributed in trunk circuits 96 ~ 127 (224~255), and then they are switched to the

timeslots 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18 and 31 of the two E1s. See Table B-5 for timeslotsswitching relationship.

Table B-5 4-port star networking timeslots switching relationship

TS Port0 Port1 Port2 Port3

3 96 102 224 230

6 97 103 225 231

9 98 104 226 232

12 99 105 227 233

15 100 106 228 23418 101 107 229 235

31 127 125 255 253

Idle TSs are allocated according to TS sequence. For timeslot allocation is fixed, each

port can only be allocated with 10 idle timeslots at most, i.e., the TS 4, 5, 7, 8, 10, 11,

13, 14, 16 and 17 of each port are idle TS.

The timeslot allocation of the 4 E1 ports at Abis interface is the same, as shown in

Table B-6. In this table, T means TRX, C means Channel. For example, T0C1 means

channel1 of TRX0.

Table B-6   Abis interface timeslots distribution under 4-port star networking mode

bit

TS

01 23 45 67

0

1 T0C0 T0C1 T0C2 T0C3

2 T0C4 T0C5 T0C6 T0C7

3 FUL1

4 T1C0 T1C1 T1C2 T1C3

5 T1C4 T1C5 T1C6 T1C7

6 FUL2

7 T2C0 T2C1 T2C2 T2C3

8 T2C4 T2C5 T2C6 T2C7

9 FUL3

10 T3C0 T3C1 T3C2 T3C311 T3C4 T3C5 T3C6 T3C7

12 FUL4

13 T4C0 T4C1 T4C2 T4C3

14 T4C4 T4C5 T4C6 T4C715 FUL5

16 T5C0 T5C1 T5C2 T5C3

17 T5C4 T5C5 T5C6 T5C7

18 FUL6

19~30

31 OML

Page 246: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 246/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-20

The timeslots distribution of the two HW groups at BS interface is the same. The

timeslots distribution ofHW0 ~ HW3 is illustrated in Table B-7. In this table, S means

Site, T means TRX and C means Channel. For example, S1T2C1 means Channel1 of 

TRX2 in Site1. 

Table B-7 4-port star networking BS interface HW timeslots distribution (with 64kbit/s full rate) 

bit

TS

01 234567 01 234567 01 234567 01234567

0 S0T0C0 S0T4C0 S1T2C0 S0T0FUL

1 S0T0C1 S0T4C1 S1T2C1 S0T1FUL

2 S0T0C2 S0T4C2 S1T2C2 S0T2FUL

3 S0T0C3 S0T4C3 S1T2C3 S0T3FUL

4 S0T0C4 S0T4C4 S1T2C4 S0T4FUL5 S0T0C5 S0T4C5 S1T2C5 S0T5FUL

6 S0T0C6 S0T4C6 S1T2C6 S1T0FUL

7 S0T0C7 S0T4C7 S1T2C7 S1T1FUL8 S0T1C0 S0T5C0 S1T3C0 S1T2FUL

9 S0T1C1 S0T5C1 S1T3C1 S1T3FUL

10 S0T1C2 S0T5C2 S1T3C2 S1T4FUL

11 S0T1C3 S0T5C3 S1T3C3 S1T5FUL12 S0T1C4 S0T5C4 S1T3C4

13 S0T1C5 S0T5C5 S1T3C5

14 S0T1C6 S0T5C6 S1T3C6

15 S0T1C7 S0T5C7 S1T3C7

16 S0T2C0 S1T0C0 S1T4C0

17 S0T2C1 S1T0C1 S1T4C118 S0T2C2 S1T0C2 S1T4C2

19 S0T2C3 S1T0C3 S1T4C3

20 S0T2C4 S1T0C4 S1T4C4

21 S0T2C5 S1T0C5 S1T4C522 S0T2C6 S1T0C6 S1T4C6

23 S0T2C7 S1T0C7 S1T4C7

24 S0T3C0 S1T1C0 S1T5C0

25 S0T3C1 S1T1C1 S1T5C1

26 S0T3C2 S1T1C2 S1T5C2

27 S0T3C3 S1T1C3 S1T5C3

28 S0T3C4 S1T1C4 S1T5C4

29 S0T3C5 S1T1C5 S1T5C5 OML1

30 S0T3C6 S1T1C6 S1T5C6

31 S0T3C7 S1T1C7 S1T5C7 OML0

HW0 HW1 HW2 HW3

II. 6E1port*2TRX/port

6 E1 port * 2TRX/port, abbreviated as 6-port star networking, as shown in

Figure B-20.

Page 247: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 247/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-21

SITE0

SITE1

SITE2

SITE3

SITE4

SITE5

BIE0

1

2

3

4

HW0

HW1

HW2

HW3

 Abis

5

 

Figure B-20 6-port star networking

Under this networking mode, the capacity of each E1 port is 2 TRXs and the rate of 

LAPD is 64kbit/s. It does not support chain connection or multi-chain networking.

Each BIE occupies only 4 HWs, HW0 ~ HW3, which are multiplexed to port0~port5.

Signaling timeslots are distributed in the trunk circuits 96~127, which are switched to

the TS3, TS6 and TS31 of the 6 E1s. The timeslot switching relationship is illustrated

in Table 8-5.

Table B-8 6-port star networking TS switching relationship

TS Port0 Port1 Port2 Port3 Port4 Port5

3 96 98 100 102 104 1066 97 99 101 103 105 107

31 127 125 123 121 119 117

Idle TSs are allocated according to TS sequence. For timeslot allocation is fixed, each

port can only be allocated with up to 2 idle timeslots, i.e. TS 4 and TS 5 are idle TSs.

The timeslot allocation of the 6 E1 ports at Abis interface is the same, as shown in

Table B-9. In this table, T means TRX, C means Channel. For example, T0C1 means

channel1 of TRX0.

Table B-9 6-port star networking Abis interface timeslots distribution

bit

TS

01 23 45 67

0

1 T0C0 T0C1 T0C2 T0C3

2 T0C4 T0C5 T0C6 T0C7

3 FUL1

4 T1C0 T1C1 T1C2 T1C3

5 T1C4 T1C5 T1C6 T1C7

6 FUL2

Page 248: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 248/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-22

bit

TS

01 23 45 67

7~30

31 OML

The timeslots of the HWs at BS interface are distributed as illustrated in Table B-10.

In this table, S means Site, T means TRX and C means Channel. For example,

S2T0C0 means Channel0 of TRX0 in Site2.

Table B-10 6port star networking BS interface HW timeslots distribution (with 64kbit/s full rate)

bit

TS

01 234567 01 234567 01 234567 01234567

0 S0T0C0 S2T0C0 S4T0C0 S0T0FUL1 S0T0C1 S2T0C1 S4T0C1 S0T1FUL

2 S0T0C2 S2T0C2 S4T0C2 S1T0FUL

3 S0T0C3 S2T0C3 S4T0C3 S1T1FUL

4 S0T0C4 S2T0C4 S4T0C4 S2T0FUL

5 S0T0C5 S2T0C5 S4T0C5 S2T1FUL

6 S0T0C6 S2T0C6 S4T0C6 S3T0FUL

7 S0T0C7 S2T0C7 S4T0C7 S3T1FUL

8 S0T1C0 S2T1C0 S4T1C0 S4T0FUL

9 S0T1C1 S2T1C1 S4T1C1 S4T1FUL

10 S0T1C2 S2T1C2 S4T1C2 S5T0FUL

11 S0T1C3 S2T1C3 S4T1C3 S5T1FUL

12 S0T1C4 S2T1C4 S4T1C4

13 S0T1C5 S2T1C5 S4T1C514 S0T1C6 S2T1C6 S4T1C6

15 S0T1C7 S2T1C7 S4T1C716 S1T0C0 S3T0C0 S5T0C0

17 S1T0C1 S3T0C1 S5T0C1

18 S1T0C2 S3T0C2 S5T0C2

19 S1T0C3 S3T0C3 S5T0C320 S1T0C4 S3T0C4 S5T0C4

21 S1T0C5 S3T0C5 S5T0C5 OML5

22 S1T0C6 S3T0C6 S5T0C6

23 S1T0C7 S3T0C7 S5T0C7 OML4

24 S1T1C0 S3T1C0 S5T1C0

25 S1T1C1 S3T1C1 S5T1C1 OML3

26 S1T1C2 S3T1C2 S5T1C227 S1T1C3 S3T1C3 S5T1C3 OML2

28 S1T1C4 S3T1C4 S5T1C4

29 S1T1C5 S3T1C5 S5T1C5 OML130 S1T1C6 S3T1C6 S5T1C6

31 S1T1C7 S3T1C7 S5T1C7 OML0

HW0 HW1 HW2 HW3

B.4.4 Chain Networking

Chain networking is illustrated in Figure B-21.

Page 249: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 249/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-23

BSC BTS0 BTS1 BTS2

 

Figure B-21 Chain networking

For chain networking or star networking with the number of TRXs for each BTS is

more than 6, data are configured the same as that for chain networking. Four 

scenarios are described for the data configuration of chain networking.

1) If 10:1 mode is adopted, when the total number of TRXs on the chain is no more

than 10 (called as single chain), one E1 can be led out respectively from port0

and port2 of the BIE, then connected respectively to the TMUs of BTS. Thus, two

single chains can be formed. See Figure B-22.

2) If 10:1 mode is adopted, when the total number of TRXs on the chain is greater 

than 10 (called as dual chain), the number of TRXs in all levels of BTSs is so

great that one E1 cannot bear all of them in chain connection. In this scenario,

one E1 can be led out from port0 and port2 of the BIE, and then connected to

the port0 and port1 on the TMU of the first level of BTS. Thus, a dual chain can

be formed to meet the capacity requirement. See Figure B-23.

3) If 12:1 mode is adopted, when the total number of TRXs on the chain is no

greater than 12, single chain connection is adopted. But when the total number 

of TRXs on the chain is greater than 12, dual chain connection is adopted.

4) If 15:1 mode is adopted, when the total number of TRXs on the chain is no

greater than 15, single chain connection is adopted. But when the total number of TRXs on the chain is greater than 15, dual chain connection is adopted.

TMU

E1 port0

E1 port2

BIE

HW0~HW3

HW4~HW7

SITE0

SITE0

SITEm

SITEn

 

Figure B-22 Single chain connection

TMU

E1 port0

E1 port2

BIE

HW0~HW3

HW4~HW7

SITE0 SITEm

0

1

2

3

0

1

 

Figure B-23 Dual chain connection

Page 250: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 250/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-24

Chain networking supports 5 trunk mode, 2E1port * full rate 64K LPAD/port, 2E1port *

half rate 64K LPAD/port, 2E1port*15:1 multiplexing/port, simulating 12:1 and

simulating 10:1.

I. 2E1port* 64K LPAD/port trunk mode

2E1port* full rate 64K LPAD/port trunk mode is shortened as 10:1 chain configuration.

Under this networking mode, the capacity of each E1 port is 10 TRXs and the rate of 

LAPD is 64kbit/s. It supports chain connection and multi-chain networking. The port0

and port 2 of each BIE is valid for traffic, corresponding to 8 HWs. Among the 8 HWs,

HW0~HW3 are multiplexed to port0 and HW4~HW7 to port2.

Signaling timeslots are distributed in the trunk circuits 96 ~ 127 (224 ~ 255), which

are switched to the 11 signaling timeslots TS3, TS6 … and TS31 of the 2 E1s. The

timeslot switching relationship is illustrated in Table B-11.

Table B-11 10:1chain networking TS switching relationship

TS Port0 Port2

3 96 224

6 97 225

9 98 22612 99 227

15 100 228

18 101 229

21 102 230

24 103 231

27 104 232

30 105 23331 127 255

The configuration of idle timeslots is described as follows.

z  When there is no cascading, idle TSs are allocated according to TS sequence.

For timeslot allocation is fixed, each port can only be allocated with 18 idle

timeslots at most, i.e., the TS 4, 5, 7, 8, 10, 11, 13, 14, 16, 17, 19, 20, 22, 23, 25,

26, 28 and 29 are idle TS.

z  When there is cascading, the timeslot allocation of the first level of sites follows

the allocation principle under the case when there is no cascading. From the

second level of sites, the idle TSs allocation after being switched must follow the

allocation principle of the first level of sites.

When 2-port 64kbit/s LAPD rate is taken for site cascading, the number of TRXs

supported is reduced by 1 as the number of sites cascaded increases by 1, because

the signaling timeslots of different sites cannot be multiplexed. The timeslots

distribution at Abis interface is shown in Table B-12. 

Page 251: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 251/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-25

Table B-12 2-port 10:1chain networking Abis interface TS distribution 

bit

TS01234567

0 Synchronization TS

1 TRX0 traffic TS

2 TRX0 traffic TS

3 RSL0

4 TRX1 traffic TS

5 TRX1 traffic TS6 RSL1

7 TRX2 traffic TS

8 TRX2 traffic TS

9 RSL2

10 TRX3 traffic TS

11 TRX3 traffic TS12 RSL3

13 TRX4 traffic TS

14 TRX4 traffic TS15 RSL4

16 TRX5 traffic TS

17 TRX5 traffic TS

18 RSL519 TRX6 traffic TS

20 TRX6 traffic TS

21 RSL6

22 TRX7 traffic TS

23 TRX7 traffic TS

24 RSL7

25 TRX8 traffic TS

26 TRX8 traffic TS

27 RSL8

28 TRX9 traffic TS29 TRX9 traffic TS

30 RSL9

31 OML

The TS distribution of the two HW groups at BS interface is the same. See Table B-13

for the TS distribution of HW0~HW3. In this table, T means TRX and C means

Channel. For example, T4C2 means Channel2 of TRX4.

Table B-13 2-port 10:1chain networking BS interface HW TS distribution

bit

TS01 234567 01 234567 01 234567 01234567

0 T0C0 T4C0 T8C0 T0FUL

1 T0C1 T4C1 T8C1 T1FUL

2 T0C2 T4C2 T8C2 T2FUL

3 T0C3 T4C3 T8C3 T3FUL

4 T0C4 T4C4 T8C4 T4FUL5 T0C5 T4C5 T8C5 T5FUL

6 T0C6 T4C6 T8C6 T6FUL

7 T0C7 T4C7 T8C7 T7FUL

8 T1C0 T5C0 T9C0 T8FUL

9 T1C1 T5C1 T9C1 T9FUL

10 T1C2 T5C2 T9C2

11 T1C3 T5C3 T9C3

Page 252: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 252/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-26

bit

TS01 234567 01 234567 01 234567 01234567

12 T1C4 T5C4 T9C4

13 T1C5 T5C5 T9C5

14 T1C6 T5C6 T9C615 T1C7 T5C7 T9C716 T2C0 T6C0

17 T2C1 T6C1

18 T2C2 T6C2

19 T2C3 T6C3

20 T2C4 T6C4

21 T2C5 T6C5

22 T2C6 T6C6

23 T2C7 T6C7

24 T3C0 T7C0

25 T3C1 T7C1

26 T3C2 T7C2

27 T3C3 T7C3

28 T3C4 T7C429 T3C5 T7C5

30 T3C6 T7C6

31 T3C7 T7C7 OML0

HW0 HW1 HW2 HW3

Data configuration principle under 10:1 mode is described as follows.

z  The OML of each level of sites must be allocated to the 31st

TS of the incoming

E1 in its local site (achieved by the TS switching of the superior sites). The TEI of 

the OML must be configured as the minimum value among all the TEI of the

signaling link in the same TS with the rate 64kbit/s. It is recommended that the

TEI be configured as 0.

z  The sub-TS number is configured as 255 in Signaling Channel Connection

Table.

z  The signaling TSs of different sites (including OML and RSL) cannot be allocated

to the same TS.

z  Only the TCHs of the same sites can be configured to the same 64kbit/s TS.

z  For dual-chain networking, the traffic TS and signaling TS of the same TRX must

be allocated to the same port, and they cannot be allocated to two different port.

z  For BTS30 and BTS312, though many combined cabinet groups belong to the

same site (require only one OML), the RSL TSs and TCH TSs of different

cabinet groups cannot be multiplexed, i.e., the RSL TSs and TCH TSs of 

different cabinet groups are taken on as TSs of different sites.

II. 2 E1 port * 32K LPAD Multiplex Mode/port

2E1 port * half rate 64K LPAD/port is shortened as 12:1 chain configuration. Under 

this networking mode, the capacity of each E1 port is 12 TRX and the LAPD rate is

32kbit/s. It supports chain connection and multi-chain networking. The port 0 and port

2 of each BIE are valid for service, corresponding to 8 HWs, among which,

HW0~HW3 are multiplexed to port0 and HW4~HW7 are multiplexed to port2.

Page 253: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 253/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-27

The two adjacent RSLs of the same site share one TS on the E1. But two RSLs of 

different sites cannot share TS, for the cabinet groups combined are taken on as

different sites.

Signaling timeslots are distributed in the trunk circuits 96~127 (224~255), which are

switched to the 7 signaling timeslots TS3, TS8, TS13 … and TS31 of the 2 E1s. The

timeslot switching relationship is illustrated in Table B-14.

Table B-14 10:1chain networking TS switching relationship

TS Port0 Port2

3 96 224

8 98 226

13 100 228

18 102 230

23 104 232

28 106 23431 127 255

The configuration of idle timeslots is described as follows.

z  When there is no cascading, idle TSs are allocated according to TS sequence.

For timeslot allocation is fixed, each port can only be allocated with up to 22 idle

timeslots, i.e. the TSs 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 15, 16, 17, 19, 20, 21, 22, 24,

25, 26, 27, 29 and 30 are idle TSs.

z  When there is cascading, the timeslot allocation of the first level of sites follows

the allocation principle under the case when there is no cascading. From the

second level of sites, the idle TSs allocation after being switched must follow the

allocation principle of the first level of sites.

When 2-port 32kbit/s LAPD rate is taken for site cascading, the number of TRXs

supported is reduced by 2 as the number of sites cascaded increases by 1, because

the signaling timeslots of different sites cannot be multiplexed. The timeslot

distribution at Abis interface is shown in Table B-15. 

Table B-15 2-port 12:1chain networking Abis interface timeslots distribution 

bit

TS01234567

0 Synchronization TS1 TRX0 traffic TS

2 TRX0 traffic TS

3 RSL0+RSL1

4 TRX1 traffic TS

5 TRX1 traffic TS

6 TRX2 traffic TS

7 TRX2 traffic TS8 RSL2+ RSL3

9 TRX3 traffic TS

10 TRX3 traffic TS

11 TRX4 traffic TS

Page 254: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 254/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-28

bit

TS01234567

12 TRX4 traffic TS

13 RSL4+ RSL5

14 TRX5 traffic TS15 TRX5 traffic TS16 TRX6 traffic TS

17 TRX6 traffic TS

18 RSL6+RSL7

19 TRX7 traffic TS

20 TRX7 traffic TS

21 TRX8 traffic TS

22 TRX8 traffic TS

23 RSL8+RSL9

24 TRX9 traffic TS

25 TRX9 traffic TS

26 TRX10 traffic TS

27 TRX10 traffic TS

28 RSL10+RSL1129 TRX11 traffic TS

30 TRX11 traffic TS

31 OML

The TS distribution of the two HW groups at BS interface is the same. See Table 8-13

for the TS distribution of HW0~HW3. In this table, T means TRX and C means

Channel. For example, T4C2 means Channel2 of TRX4. 

Table B-16 2-port 12:1chain networking BS interface HW TS distribution 

bit

TS01 234567 01 234567 01 234567 01234567

0 T0C0 T4C0 T8C0 T0FUL, T1FUL

1 T0C1 T4C1 T8C12 T0C2 T4C2 T8C2 T2FUL, T3FUL

3 T0C3 T4C3 T8C3

4 T0C4 T4C4 T8C4 T4FUL, T5FUL

5 T0C5 T4C5 T8C5

6 T0C6 T4C6 T8C6 T6FUL, T7FUL

7 T0C7 T4C7 T8C7

8 T1C0 T5C0 T9C0 T8FUL, T9FUL9 T1C1 T5C1 T9C1

10 T1C2 T5C2 T9C2 T10FUL, T11FUL

11 T1C3 T5C3 T9C312 T1C4 T5C4 T9C4

13 T1C5 T5C5 T9C5

14 T1C6 T5C6 T9C6

15 T1C7 T5C7 T9C7

16 T2C0 T6C0 T10C0

17 T2C1 T6C1 T10C1

18 T2C2 T6C2 T10C2

19 T2C3 T6C3 T10C3

20 T2C4 T6C4 T10C4

21 T2C5 T6C5 T10C5

22 T2C6 T6C6 T10C6

23 T2C7 T6C7 T10C7

24 T3C0 T7C0 T11C0 

25 T3C1 T7C1 T11C1

Page 255: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 255/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-29

bit

TS01 234567 01 234567 01 234567 01234567

26 T3C2 T7C2 T11C2

27 T3C3 T7C3 T11C3

28 T3C4 T7C4 T11C429 T3C5 T7C5 T11C530 T3C6 T7C6 T11C6

31 T3C7 T7C7 T11C7 OML0

HW0 HW1 HW2 HW3

Data configuration principle under 12:1 mode is described as follows.

z  The OML of each level of sites must be allocated to the 31st

TS of the incoming

E1 in its local site (achieved by the TS switching of the superior sites). The TEI of 

the OML must be configured as the minimum value among all the TEI of the

signaling link in the same TS with rate 64kbit/s. It is recommended that the TEIbe configured as 0.

z  The sub-TS number is configured as 32 or 33 in Signaling Channel Connection

Table according to actual practice.

For BTS30 and BTS312, though many combined cabinet groups belong to the

same site (require only one OML), the RSL TSs and TCH TSs of different

cabinet groups cannot be multiplexed, i.e., the RSL TSs and TCH TSs of 

different cabinet groups are taken on as TSs of different sites.

z  For BTS20 under 12:1 mode, the RSL of TRX0 can only be multiplexed with the

RSL of TRX1 to the same 64kbit/s TS, and the RSL of TRX2 can only bemultiplexed with the RSL of TRX3 to the same 64kbit/s TS and so on. The same

principle is applicable to the RSL of other TRXs.

z  The signaling TSs of different sites (including OML and RSL) cannot be allocated

to the same TS.

z  Only the TCHs of the same site can be configured to the same 64kbit/s TS.

z  For dual-chain networking, the traffic TS and signaling TS of the same TRX must

be allocated to the same port, and they cannot be allocated to two different ports.

For BTS30 and BTS312, the RSL TSs and TCH TSs of different cabinet groups

cannot be multiplexed, for the cabinet groups combined are taken on as different sites,

though they actually belong to the same site (they require only one OML).

III. 6 E1 Ports (Supporting 16K)

In the original networking mode, RSL and OML occupy 8 bits of each byte in the

64kbit/s E1 timeslot. In the 16K networking mode, the same as TCH, the RSL and

OML only occupy 2 bits of each byte, i.e. 16kbit/s transmission bandwidth resources.

The 16K networking saves E1 transmission (timeslot) resources on the Abis interface,

especially, the transmission cost when there are not much TRXs in the BTS. When

Page 256: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 256/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-30

satellite transmission is adopted on the Abis interface, the expensive fee for the

leased satellite circuit can be saved.

For a group of BIE boards, 6 E1 ports are available, and 4 HWs are allocated

accordingly. The distribution of the timeslots corresponding to HW0~HW3 on the BS

interface is shown in Table B-17.

Table B-17 HW timeslot distribution on the BS interface in 6-E1 port 16K networking mode

bit

TS01 234567 01 234567 01 234567 01 234567

0 1C1 2C1 3C1

1 1C2 2C2 3C2

2 1C3 2C3 3C3

3 1C4 2C4 3C4

4 1C5 2C5 3C5

5 1C6 2C6 3C66 1C7 2C7 3C77 1C8 2C8 3C8

8 1C9 2C9 3C9 4C9

9 1C10 2C10 3C10 4C10

10 1C11 2C11 3C11 4C11

11 1C12 2C12 3C12 4C12

12 1C13 2C13 3C13 4C1313 1C14 2C14 3C14 4C14

14 1C15 2C15 3C15 4C15

15 1C16 2C16 3C16 4C16

16 1C17 2C17 3C17 4C17

17 1C18 2C18 3C18 4C18

18 1C19 2C19 3C19 4C19

19 1C20 2C20 3C20 4C2020 1C21 2C21 3C21 4C21

21 1C22 2C22 3C22 4C22

22 1C23 2C23 3C23 4C23

23 1C24 2C24 3C24 4C24

24 1C25 2C25 3C25 4C25

25 1C26 2C26 3C26 4C2626 1C27 2C27 3C27 4C27

27 1C28 2C28 3C28 4C28

28 1C29 2C29 3C29 4C29

29 1C30 2C30 3C30 4C30

30 1C31 2C31 3C31 4C31

31 1C32 2C32 3C32 4C32

HW0 HW1 HW2 HW3

In the 4-E1 port * 16K signaling link networking mode, a BIE board occupies 4 HWs

(HW0~HW3). The timeslots of HW0~HW2 are respectively switched to TS1 and TS2,

and TS4 and TS5 of E1(0) ~ E1(5). This is the same as the original 6*E1 port star 

networking mode.

Timeslot combination of HW3: The latter 24 16K timeslots are combined into 6 64K

timeslots, which can be understood as the OML timeslots in the original star 

networking mode. Actually the 24 16K timeslots can be used for TCH. The 6

combined timeslots are respectively allocated to E1(0) ~ E1(5) of TS31.

Page 257: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 257/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-31

The timeslot distribution on the Abis interface in 6-E1 port 16K networking mode is

shown in Table B-18.

Table B-18 Timeslot distribution on the Abis interface in 6-E1 port * 16K networking mode

E1(0) E1(1)

0

1 1C1 1C2 1C3 1C4 1C17 1C18 1C19 1C20

2 1C5 1C6 1C7 1C8 1C21 1C22 1C23 1C24

3

4 1C9 1C10 1C11 1C12 1C25 1C26 1C27 1C28

5 1C13 1C14 1C15 1C16 1C29 1C30 1C31 1C32

6

7

26

27

28

29

30

31 4C29 4C30 4C31 4C32 4C25 4C26 4C27 4C28

E1(2) E1(3)

0

1 2C1 2C2 2C3 2C4 2C17 2C18 2C19 2C202 2C5 2C6 2C7 2C8 2C21 2C22 2C23 2C24

3

4 2C9 2C10 2C11 2C12 2C25 2C26 2C27 2C28

5 2C13 2C14 2C15 2C16 2C29 2C30 2C31 2C32

6

7

26

27

28

2930

31 4C21 4C22 4C23 4C24 4C17 4C18 4C19 4C20

E1(4) E1(5)

0

1 3C1 3C2 3C3 3C4 3C17 3C18 3C19 3C20

2 3C5 3C6 3C7 3C8 3C21 3C22 3C23 3C243

4 3C9 3C10 3C11 3C12 3C25 3C26 3C27 3C28

5 3C13 3C14 3C15 3C16 3C29 3C30 3C31 3C32

6

7

Page 258: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 258/283

Page 259: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 259/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-33

bit

TS01 234567 01 234567 01 234567 01 234567

23 1C24 2C24 3C24 4C24

24 1C25 2C25 3C25 4C25

25 1C26 2C26 3C26 4C2626 1C27 2C27 3C27 4C2727 1C28 2C28 3C28 4C28

28 1C29 2C29 3C29 4C29

29 1C30 2C30 3C30 4C30

30 1C31 2C31 3C31 4C31

31 1C32 2C32 3C32 4C32

HW0 HW1 HW2 HW3

Table B-20 HW timeslot distribution on the BS interface in 4-port 16K networking mode (2)

bit

TS

01 234567 01 234567 01 234567 01 234567

0 5C1 6C1 7C11 5C2 6C2 7C2

2 5C3 6C3 7C3

3 5C4 6C4 7C4

4 5C5 6C5 7C5

5 5C6 6C6 7C6

6 5C7 6C7 7C7

7 5C8 6C8 7C8

8 5C9 6C9 7C9 8C9

9 5C10 6C10 7C10 8C10

10 5C11 6C11 7C11 8C11

11 5C12 6C12 7C12 8C12

12 5C13 6C13 7C13 8C1313 5C14 6C14 7C14 8C1414 5C15 6C15 7C15 8C15

15 5C16 6C16 7C16 8C16

16 5C17 6C17 7C17 8C17

17 5C18 6C18 7C18 8C18

18 5C19 6C19 7C19 8C19

19 5C20 6C20 7C20 8C20

20 5C21 6C21 7C21 8C2121 5C22 6C22 7C22 8C22

22 5C23 6C23 7C23 8C23

23 5C24 6C24 7C24 8C24

24 5C25 6C25 7C25 8C25

25 5C26 6C26 7C26 8C26

26 5C27 6C27 7C27 8C2727 5C28 6C28 7C28 8C28

28 5C29 6C29 7C29 8C29

29 5C30 6C30 7C30 8C30

30 5C31 6C31 7C31 8C31

31 5C32 6C32 7C32 8C32

HW4 HW5 HW6 HW7

In the 6-E1 port 16K networking mode, E1 (0) and E1 (1) correspond to HW0~HW3,

and timeslots 3, 6 and 31 of each E1 come from the combined timeslot of HW4. E1(2)

and E1(3) correspond to HW4~HW7, and the timeslot allocation principle is the same

as that on E1(0) and E1(1), and will no longer be described below.

Page 260: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 260/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-34

The mapping relation from HW to the timeslot of E1 in 16K networking mode is similar 

to that in the original 64K star networking mode in some aspects.

The timeslots of HW0~HW2 are respectively switched to TS1 & TS2, TS4 & TS5, TS7

& TS8, TS10 & TS11, TS13 & TS14, and TS16 & TS17 of E1(0) and E1(1). This is

completely the same as that in the original star networking mode.

Timeslot combination of HW3: The latter 24 16K timeslots are combined into 6 64K

timeslots, which can be understood as the RSL and OML timeslots in the original star 

networking mode. Actually the 24 16K timeslots can be used for TCH. The former two

combined timeslots are switched to TS3 and TS6 of E1(0); the third and fourth

combined ones are switched to TS3 and TS6 of E1(1); the last two combined ones

are switched to TS31 of E1(0) and E1(1).

Table B-21 illustrates the distribution of the timeslots on the 4 E1 ports of the Abisinterface.

Table B-21 Timeslot distribution on the Abis interface in 4-E1 port * 16K signaling link networking mode

E1(2) E1(3)

0

1 5C1 5C2 5C3 5C4 6C17 6C18 6C19 6C20

2 5C5 5C6 5C7 5C8 6C21 6C22 6C23 6C243 8C9 8C10 8C11 8C12 8C17 8C18 8C19 8C20

4 5C9 5C10 5C11 5C12 6C25 6C26 6C27 6C28

5 5C13 5C14 5C15 5C16 6C29 6C30 6C31 6C32

6 8C13 8C14 8C15 8C16 8C21 8C22 8C23 8C24

E1(0) E1(1)

0

1 1C1 1C2 1C3 1C4 2C17 2C18 2C19 2C20

2 1C5 1C6 1C7 1C8 2C21 2C22 2C23 2C24

3 4C9 4C10 4C11 4C12 4C17 4C18 4C19 4C20

4 1C9 1C10 1C11 1C12 2C25 2C26 2C27 2C285 1C13 1C14 1C15 1C16 2C29 2C30 2C31 2C32

6 4C13 4C14 4C15 4C16 4C21 4C22 4C23 4C24

7 1C17 1C18 1C19 1C20 3C1 3C2 2C3 3C48 1C21 1C22 1C23 1C24 3C5 3C6 3C7 3C8

9

10 1C25 1C26 1C27 1C28 3C9 3C10 3C11 3C1211 1C29 1C30 1C31 1C32 3C13 3C14 3C15 3C16

12

13 2C1 2C2 2C3 2C4 3C17 3C18 3C19 3C20

14 2C5 2C6 2C7 2C8 3C21 3C22 3C23 3C24

15

16 2C9 2C10 2C11 2C12 3C25 3C26 3C27 3C28

17 2C13 2C14 2C15 2C16 3C29 3C30 3C31 3C32

18

19

28

29

3031 4C29 4C30 4C31 4C32 4C25 4C26 4C27 4C28

Page 261: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 261/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-35

E1(2) E1(3)

7 5C17 5C18 5C19 5C20 7C1 7C2 7C3 7C4

8 5C21 5C22 5C23 5C24 7C5 7C6 7C7 7C8

9

10 5C25 5C26 5C27 5C28 7C9 7C10 7C11 7C1211 5C29 5C30 5C31 5C32 7C13 7C14 7C15 7C16

12

13 6C1 6C2 6C3 6C4 7C17 7C18 7C19 7C20

14 6C5 6C6 6C7 6C8 7C21 7C22 7C23 7C24

1516 6C9 6C10 6C11 6C12 7C25 7C26 7C27 7C28

17 6C13 6C14 6C15 6C16 7C29 7C30 7C31 7C32

18

19

28

2930

31 8C29 8C30 8C31 8C32 8C25 8C26 8C27 8C28

V. 2E1 port * multiplex/port

2E1 port * 15:1 multiplexing /port is shortened as 15:1 chain configuration. Under this

networking mode, the capacity of each E1 port is 15 TRX. It supports chain

connection and multi-chain networking. The port0 and port2 of each BIE are valid for 

service, corresponding to 8 HWs, among which, HW0~HW3 are multiplexed to port0

and HW4~HW7 are multiplexed to port2.

The rate of LAPD is 64kbit/s, shared by 4 signaling links, The TCH traffic TS at Abis

interface is not occupied by SDCCH and BCCH alone.

Note:

When the BIE supporting 15:1 configuration replaces the BIE not supporting 15:1 configuration, the data

configuration under 12:1 and 10:1 mode are different.

When BTS20 adopts 15:1 data configuration, BSMU should be used.

The configuration of idle timeslots is described as follows.

z  When there is no cascading, idle TSs are allocated according to TS sequence.

For timeslot allocation is fixed, each port can only be allocated with 25 idle

timeslots at most, i.e. the TS3~TS27 of each port are idle TSs.

z  When there is cascading, the timeslot allocation of the first level of sites follows

the allocation principle under the case when there is no cascading. From the

second level of sites, the idle TSs allocation after being switched must follow the

allocation principle of the first level of sites.

Page 262: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 262/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-36

 At Abis interface, there are 108 sub-TSs from TS1 to TS27 for the service channel of 

15 TRXs. There are 16 signaling links for TS28 to TS31. Among the 16 signaling links,

4 share one 64kbit/s TS.

When 2-port 64kbit/s LAPD statistics multiplexing is taken for site cascading, the

number of TRXs supported is reduced by 1 as the number of sites cascaded is

increased by 1, because the signaling timeslots of different sites cannot be

multiplexed.

TSs distribution on the Abis interface is illustrated in Table B-22.

Table B-22 2-port 15:1chain networking Abis interface timeslots distribution

bit

TS

01234567

0 Synchronization TS

1~27 TRX0~TRX14 traffic TS

28 RSL11+RSL12+ RSL13+RSL14

29 RSL7+RSL8+ RSL9+RSL10

30 RSL3+RSL4+ RSL5+RSL6

31 RSL0+RSL1+ RSL2+OML

There are altogether 224 16kbit/s traffic channel and 32 64kbit/s signaling channels in

HW pattern at BS interface. Take 7.2 traffic channels for each TRX on the average, it

can support 31 TRXs at the maximum. See Table B-23 for the HW TSs distribution at

BS interface. In this table, xCx means the TSs transmitting traffic and xFx means the

TS transmitting signaling.

Table B-23 HW TSs distribution at BS interface

bit

TS

01 234567 01 234567 01 234567 01234567

0 1C1 2C1 3C1 4F16

1 1C2 2C2 3C2 4F15

2 1C3 2C3 3C3 4F14

3 1C4 2C4 3C4 4F134 1C5 2C5 3C5 4F12

5 1C6 2C6 3C6 4F11

6 1C7 2C7 3C7 4F10

7 1C8 2C8 3C8 4F98 1C9 2C9 3C9 4F8

9 1C10 2C10 3C10 4F7

10 1C11 2C11 3C11 4F6

11 1C12 2C12 3C12 4F5

12 1C13 2C13 3C13 4F4

13 1C14 2C14 3C14 4F3

14 1C15 2C15 3C15 4F215 1C16 2C16 3C16 4F1

16 1C17 2C17 3C17 4C17

17 1C18 2C18 3C18 4C18

Page 263: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 263/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-37

bit

TS

01 234567 01 234567 01 234567 01234567

18 1C19 2C19 3C19 4C19

19 1C20 2C20 3C20 4C20

20 1C21 2C21 3C21 4C2121 1C22 2C22 3C22 4C2222 1C23 2C23 3C23 4C23

23 1C24 2C24 3C24 4C24

24 1C25 2C25 3C25 4C25

25 1C26 2C26 3C26 4C26

26 1C27 2C27 3C27 4C27

27 1C28 2C28 3C28 4C28

28 1C29 2C29 3C29 4C29

29 1C30 2C30 3C30 4C30

30 1C31 2C31 3C31 4C31

31 1C32 2C32 3C32 4C32

HW0 HW0 HW0 HW3

Data configuration principle under 15:1 mode is described as follows.

z  The OML of each level of sites must be allocated to the 31st

TS of the incoming

E1 in its local site (achieved by the TS switching of the superior sites). The TEI of 

the OML must be configured as the minimum value among all the TEIs of the

signaling link in the same TS with rate 64kbit/s. It is recommended that the TEI

be configured as 0.

z  Different from TCH, BCCH and SDCCH do not occupy traffic TS and their CICs

and TS numbers are 65535 and their sub-TS Numbers are 255.

z  The sub-TS number is configured as 0, 1, 2 or 3 in the Signaling ChannelConnection Table according to actual situations.

z  To configure signaling links, configure the TSs are loading sharing according to

the traffic on each link so that the RSL link of the TRX containing SDCCH can be

distributed to different TSs.

z  For BTS20, in the first level of sites, all the signaling TSs must be allocated to

the last four TSs TS28-TS31 of the last level of E1. But the signaling TSs of the

subsequent level of sites can be allocated to the TS16-TS31 of its superior E1

according to actual demand. By this principle, the superior level of sites should

forward all the signaling TSs of its subsequent level of sites to the last four TSs

of the cascaded E1.

z  For BTS30, the signaling TSs of the first level of sites can be allocated to

TS31~TS16 of E1 in sequence. If there is cascading, the OML of the lower level

of sites must be allocated to 31st

TS, while RSL can be allocated to any TS after 

TCH TS.

z  The signaling TSs of different sites (including OML and RSL) cannot be allocated

to the same TS.

z  Only the TCHs of the same sites can be configured to the same 64kbit/s TS.

z  For dual-chain networking, the traffic TS and signaling TS of the same TRX must

be allocated to the same port, and they cannot be allocated to two different ports.

Page 264: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 264/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-38

z  Though many combined cabinet groups belong to the same site (they require

only one OML), the RSL TSs and TCH TSs of different cabinet groups cannot be

multiplexed, i.e., the RSL TSs and TCH TSs of different cabinet groups are taken

on as TSs of different sites.

VI. Sim 12:1 and Sim 10:1 data configuration

Data configuration of the BIE supporting 15:1 cannot directly take the 12:1 and 10:1

data configuration of the BIE not supporting 15:1.

For BTS20, if the interface board is not BSMU and the BSC uses the BIE that

supports 15:1, data configuration for simulating 12:1 and 10:1 can be taken for 

equipment compatibility.

1) Data configuration for simulating 12:1

Under simulating 12:1 configuration, the link rate of LAPD is 32kbit/s. The timeslots

distribution table is illustrated in Table B-24.

Table B-24 The timeslots distribution under simulating 12:1 configuration

bit

TS01 23 45 67

0 Synchronization

1 V0.0 V0.1 V0.2 V0.3

2 V0.4 V0.5 V0.6 V0.7

3 V1.0 V1.1 V1.2 V1.3

4 V1.4 V1.5 V1.6 V1.7

5 V2.0 V2.1 V2.2 V2.36 V2.4 V2.5 V2.6 V2.7

7 V3.0 V3.1 V3.2 V3.3

8 V3.4 V3.5 V3.6 V3.7

9 V4.0 V4.1 V4.2 V4.3

10 V4.4 V4.5 V4.6 V4.7

11 V5.0 V5.1 V5.2 V5.312 V5.4 V5.5 V5.6 V5.7

13 V6.0 V6.1 V6.2 V6.3

14 V6.4 V6.5 V6.6 V6.7

15 V7.0 V7.1 V7.2 V7.3

16 V7.4 V7.5 V7.6 V7.7

17 V8.0 V8.1 V8.2 V8.3

18 V8.4 V8.5 V8.6 V8.719 V9.0 V9.1 V9.2 V9.3

20 V9.4 V9.5 V9.6 V9.7

21 V10.0 V10.1 V10.2 V10.3

22 V10.4 V10.5 V10.6 V10.7

23 V11.0 V11.1 V11.2 V11.3

24 V11.4 V11.5 V11.6 V11.7

25 RSL10+RSL11

26 RSL8+RSL9

27 RSL6+RSL7

28 RSL4+RSL5

29 RSL2+RSL3

30 RSL0+RSL1

31 OML

Page 265: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 265/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-39

Idle TSs are allocated according to TS sequence. Each port can only be allocated

with 22 idle timeslots at most, i.e., the TS3~TS24 of each port are idle TSs.

Data configuration for simulating 10:1

Under simulating 10:1 configuration, the link rate of LAPD is 64kbit/s. The timeslots

distribution table is illustrated in Table B-25.

Table B-25 The timeslots distribution under simulating 10:1 configuration

bit

TS

01 23 45 67

0 Synchronization

1 V0.0 V0.1 V0.2 V0.3

2 V0.4 V0.5 V0.6 V0.7

3 V1.0 V1.1 V1.2 V1.3

4 V1.4 V1.5 V1.6 V1.7

5 V2.0 V2.1 V2.2 V2.36 V2.4 V2.5 V2.6 V2.77 V3.0 V3.1 V3.2 V3.3

8 V3.4 V3.5 V3.6 V3.7

9 V4.0 V4.1 V4.2 V4.3

10 V4.4 V4.5 V4.6 V4.7

11 V5.0 V5.1 V5.2 V5.3

12 V5.4 V5.5 V5.6 V5.713 V6.0 V6.1 V6.2 V6.3

14 V6.4 V6.5 V6.6 V6.7

15 V7.0 V7.1 V7.2 V7.3

16 V7.4 V7.5 V7.6 V7.7

17 V8.0 V8.1 V8.2 V8.3

18 V8.4 V8.5 V8.6 V8.7

19 V9.0 V9.1 V9.2 V9.320 V9.4 V9.5 V9.6 V9.7

21 RSL9

22 RSL8

23 RSL7

24 RSL6

25 RSL526 RSL4

27 RSL3

28 RSL2

29 RSL1

30 RSL0

31 OML

Idle TSs are allocated according to TS sequence. Each port can only be allocated

with 18 idle timeslots at most, i.e., the TS3~TS20 of each port are idle TSs.

B.4.5 Tree Networking

Tree networking is illustrated in Figure B-24.

Page 266: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 266/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-40

BSC

BTS0

BTS1

BTS2

BTS3

BTS4

 

Figure B-24 Tree networking

Tree connection means more than 2 lower level of sites are connected to a upper 

level of site. It is an extension of chain networking.

 Another form of tree connection is star cascading, i.e., star connection + chain

connection.

There are two trunk modes of BIE supporting star cascading, 6E1port * 2TRX/port

(support link) and 4E1port * 6TRX/port (support link).

B.4.6 Half Rate Networking

I. Overview

Different from star, chain and tree networking modes, half rate networking is more

actually a kind of data configuration principle. It belongs to the same concept with

6-E1 port * 2TRX/port networking (supporting link) and 4-E1 port * 6TRX/port

(supporting link) networking mentioned above. Therefore, the half rate networking is

called half rate mode hereinafter.

In the half rate mode, 34BIE must be used. This kind of BIE adopts discretionary

switching mode. Therefore, the 256 HW timeslots on the BS interface can be

allocated to the voice channels or signaling channels at discretion, provided the

number of timeslots is equal to or smaller than 256. Each voice channel needs to be

allocated with 2 HW timeslots. Similarly, among the 32 E1 timeslots on the Abis

interface, except that TS0 is used for synchronization and that TS31 must be

allocated to OML, the remaining 30 timeslots can be allocated to voice channels or 

signaling channels at discretion provided that the total number of timeslots is not

more than 30. The rate of LAPD is 64kbit/s, and statistics multiplexing mode is

adopted for site cascading. Every 2 signaling links can be multiplexed to one LAPD

link (different from 15:1 data configuration mode). SDCCH and BCCH do not occupy

the timeslots on the Abis interface.

In the half rate mode, the 6 E1 ports of each group of BIEs are valid. The number of 

TRXs supported by each E1 port can be configured at discretion, provided it is not

Page 267: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 267/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-41

more than 13, and that the total number of TRXs configured to all the 6 E1 ports is not

more than 18. The half rate mode supports such as star, chain, tree networking

modes, etc. When site cascading is adopted, as the signaling timeslots of different

sites cannot multiplexed, once a site increases, the number of TRXs supported byeach E1 port will decrease.

II. Principle for configuration of idle timeslots

The configuration of idle timeslots is described as follows.

z  When there is no cascading, idle timeslots are allocated according to timeslot

sequence. For timeslot allocation is fixed, each port can only be allocated with up

to 28 timeslots as idle timeslots. That is, timeslots 3~30 of each port can be

allocated as idle timeslots.

z  When there is cascading, the timeslot allocation of the first level of sites followsthe allocation principle under the case when there is no cascading. From the

second level of sites, the allocation of the idle timeslots after being switched

must follow the allocation principle of the first level of sites.

III. Data configuration principle

z  The OML of each level of sites must be allocated to the 31st

TS of the incoming

E1 in its local site (achieved by the TS switching of the superior sites). The TEI of 

the OML must be configured as the minimum value among all the TEIs of the

signaling link in the same TS with rate of 64kbit/s. It is recommended that the TEI

be configured as 0.

z  The multiplexing ratio of OML and that of RSL are 2:1.

z  Separated from TCH, BCCH and SDCCH do not occupy voice timeslots and

their CICs and TS numbers are 65535 and their sub-TS numbers are 255.

z  The sub-TS number is configured as 0 or 1 in the Signaling Channel Connection

Table according to actual situations.

z  The signaling TSs (including TSs of OML and RSL) and traffic TSs (of TCH) of 

different sites cannot be allocated to the same TS. In case of cabinet group

combination, though multiple combined cabinet groups belong to the same site

(only one OML required), the RSL TSs and TCH TSs of different cabinet groupscannot be multiplexed, i.e., the RSL TSs and TCH TSs of different cabinet

groups are taken on as TSs of different sites.

z  For dual-chain networking, the traffic TS and signaling TS of the same TRX must

be allocated to the same port, and they cannot be allocated to two different ports.

z  The 256 HW timeslots (trunk circuits) of the BS1 interface are numbered

sequentially. The TCH timeslots are allocated sequentially from 0 to 255, while

the OML and RSL timeslots are allocated sequentially from 255 to 0.

z  To support dynamic adjustment to channel rate, two HW timeslots are allocated

to each TCH in the Radio Channel Configuration Table. When the TCH type is

configured as full rate, the full-rate TCH occupies one timeslot, and the other one

Page 268: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 268/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-42

is idle in normal cases. When the channel rate is adjusted, i.e. one full-rate TCH

is adjusted into two half-rate TCHs, each of the two half-rate TCHs occupies a

timeslot. When the TCH type is set as half rate, there are actually two half-rate

TCHs, and each occupies a HW timeslot.

IV. Example

BIE is configured with data based on half rate mode. Its port 0 is connected with a

BTS configured with two TRXs. Channel 0 of TRX 0 is "Primary BCCH", and channel

1 is "SDCCH8". Other channels of TRX 0 and all the channels of TRX 1 are

configured to be "Full rate TCH". The networking topology of BTS is illustrated below:

BSC Site 0

BIEPort 0

 

Figure B-25 BTS networking topology in half rate mode

1) HW timeslots

Table B-26 HW timeslot in half rate mode

HW0 HW1 HW2 HW3 HW4 HW5 HW6 HW70 T0C2 32 64 96 128 160 192 224

1 33 65 97 129 161 193 225

2 T0C3 34 66 98 130 162 194 226

3 35 67 99 131 163 195 227

4 T0C4 36 68 100 132 164 196 228

5 37 69 101 133 165 197 229

6 T0C5 38 70 102 134 166 198 230

7 39 71 103 135 167 199 231

8 T0C6 40 72 104 136 168 200 232

9 41 73 105 137 169 201 233

10 T0C7 42 74 106 138 170 202 234

11 43 75 107 139 171 203 235

12 T1C0 44 76 108 140 172 204 236

13 45 77 109 141 173 205 237

14 T1C1 46 78 110 142 174 206 238

15 47 79 111 143 175 207 239

16 T1C2 48 80 112 144 176 208 24017 49 81 113 145 177 209 241

18 T1C3 50 82 114 146 178 210 242

19 51 83 115 147 179 211 243

20 T1C4 52 84 116 148 180 212 244

21 53 85 117 149 181 213 245

22 T1C5 54 86 118 150 182 214 246

23 55 87 119 151 183 215 24724 T1C6 56 88 120 152 184 216 248

25 57 89 121 153 185 217 249

26 T1C7 58 90 122 154 186 218 25027 59 91 123 155 187 219 251

Page 269: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 269/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-43

HW0 HW1 HW2 HW3 HW4 HW5 HW6 HW7

28 60 92 124 156 188 220 252

29 61 93 125 157 189 221 253

30 62 94 126 158 190 222 254 RSL1

31 63 95 127 159 191 223 255 OMLRSL0

2) Abis timeslot

Table B-27  Abis timeslots in half rate mode

Bit

TS

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

0 Synchronization TS

1 T0C2 T0C3 T0C4 T0C5

2 T0C6 T0C7 T1C0 T1C13 T1C2 T1C3 T1C4 T1C5

4 T1C6 T1C7

30 RSL1

31 OML0 RSL0

B.4.7 Ring Networking

I. Overview

Ring networking provides a site cascading mode different from star, chain and tree

networking modes, but it supports star, chain and tree networking, as shown in

Figure B-26.

Page 270: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 270/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-44

Figure B-26 Ring networking modes

In ring networking mode, the 6 E1 ports provided by each group of BIEs are all valid,

the number of TRXs supported by each E1 port should not exceed 15, and the total

number of TRXs configured to all the 6 ports should not be larger than 30. When

there is more than one site in the ring networking mode, as the signaling timeslots of 

different sites cannot be multiplexed, once a site increases, the number of TRXs

supported by each E1 port will decrease.

Parallel transparent transmission is adopted when multiple BTSs are cascaded in ring

networking mode.

During the configuration of ring networking, any two of the 6 E1 ports provided by

each group of BIEs can form a ring.

In ring networking mode, sites are classified into loop site and tributary site. As for a

loop site, only port 0 can serve as the incoming port, and port 1 as the outgoing port.

 As for a tributary site, port 0 must serve as the incoming port, while any of the other 

ports besides port 1 can serve as the outgoing port.

 As shown in Figure B-26, sites 0, 1 and 2 in a are linked into a ring, and they are all

loop sites; sites 3 and 4 are linked into a chain. Sites 0, 1 and 2 in b are linked into a

ring, and they are all loop sites; sites 3 and 4 form a dual-chain connection together 

with the ring, and the three are taken on as tributary sites. The networking of c is

similar to that of b, except that the normal ring and reverse ring are connected to the

ports provided by BIEs of different groups. Sites 0, 1, 2 and 3 in d are linked into a

ring, in which sites 0, 1 and 2 are loop sites, and site 3 is a tributary site.

Page 271: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 271/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-45

The configuration of idle timeslots is not supported in the full-rate ring networking

mode for the moment.

Ring networking includes full-rate ring networking and half-rate networking. Their 

differences are listed below:

z  The multiplexing ratio of RSL signaling in full-rate ring networking mode is 4:1,

while that in half-rate ring networking mode is 2:1.

z  Some HW slots should be reserved in half-rate ring networking mode.

II. Brief introduction to 34BIE

Caution:

34BIE must be used in ring networking mode.

The features of 34BIE are described as follows:

z  Discretionary switching of timeslots is adopted. As a result, the 256 HW timeslots

of the BS interface can be allocated to voice channels or signaling channels at

discretion, provided that the total number of timeslots is not more than 256.

z  Similarly, among the 32 E1 timeslots of the Abis interface, except that timeslot 0

is used for synchronization, and that timeslot 31 must be allocated to the OML,

the other 30 timeslots can be allocated to voice channels or signaling channels

at discretion, provided that the total number of timeslots is not more than 30.

z  The rate of LAPD is 64kbit/s, and statistics multiplexing mode is adopted. Every

4 signaling links can be multiplexed to one LAPD link. Please note that only

RSLs can be multiplexed to each other, and that RSL cannot be multiplexed to

OML.

z  SDCCH and BCCH do not occupy timeslots of the Abis interface.

III. Full rate ring networking

Principle for data configuration in full-rate ring networking mode:

z  Normal ring OML and reverse ring OML should be configured to each site on the

ring (including tributary site). The normal ring OML is allocated to TS31 of the

normal ring E1 port (achieved by TS switching of the superior sites). The reverse

ring OML is allocated to TS31 of the reverse ring E1 port (when two BIE ports

are linked into a ring, the port connected with port 0 of the site is regarded as the

normal ring port, and the other port as the reverse ring port).The TEI of the

normal ring OML and that of the reverse ring OML must be configured as the

minimum values among all the TEIs of the signaling link in the same TS with rate

of 64kbit/s. It is recommended that the TEIs be configured as 0

Page 272: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 272/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-46

z  OML and RSL cannot be multiplexed to each other. The multiplexing ratio of 

RSLs is 2:1.

z  When multiple sites are linked into a ring, parallel transparent transmission mode

is adopted for the timeslots of the Abis interface.z   All TCHs and RSLs should be configured with reverse ring Abis interface data.

z  Separated from TCH, BCCH and SDCCH do not occupy voice timeslots and

their CICs and TS numbers are 65535 and their sub-TS numbers 255.

z  The sub-TS number is configured as 0, 1, 2 or 3 in the Signaling Channel

Connection Table according to actual situations.

z  The signaling TSs (including TSs of OML and RSL) and traffic TSs (including TS

of TCH) of different sites cannot be allocated to the same TS. In case of cabinet

group combination, though multiple combined cabinet groups belong to the same

site (only one OML required), the RSL TSs and TCH TSs of different cabinet

groups cannot be multiplexed, i.e., the RSL TSs and TCH TSs of different

cabinet groups are taken on as TSs of different sites.

z  For dual-chain networking, the traffic TS and signaling TS of the same TRX must

be allocated to the same port, and they cannot be allocated to two different ports.

z  The 256 HW timeslots (trunk circuits) of the BS1 interface are numbered

sequentially. The TCH timeslots are allocated sequentially from 0 to 255, while

the OML and RSL timeslots are allocated sequentially from 255 to 0.

IV. Half rate ring networking

Principle for data configuration in half-rate ring networking mode:

z  Normal ring OML and reverse ring OML should be configured to each site on the

ring (including tributary site). The normal ring OML is allocated to TS31 of the

normal ring E1 port (achieved by TS switching of the superior sites). The reverse

ring OML is allocated to TS31 of the reverse ring E1 port (when two BIE ports

are linked into a ring, the port connected with port 0 of the site is regarded as the

normal ring port, and the other port as the reverse ring port).The TEI of the

normal ring OML and that of the reverse ring OML must be configured as the

minimum values among all the TEIs of the signaling link in the same TS with rate

of 64kbit/s. It is recommended that the TEIs be configured as 0.

z  OML and RSL cannot be multiplexed to each other. The multiplexing ratio of 

RSLs is 2:1.

z  When multiple sites are linked into a ring, parallel transparent transmission mode

is adopted for the timeslots of the Abis interface.

z   All TCHs and RSLs should be configured with reverse ring Abis interface data.

z  Separated from TCH, BCCH and SDCCH do no occupy voice timeslots. Their 

CICs and TS numbers are 65535, and their sub-TS numbers are 255.

z  The sub-TS number is configured as 0 or 1 in the Signaling Channel Connection

Table according to actual situations.

Page 273: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 273/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-47

z  The signaling TSs (including TSs of OML and RSL) and traffic TSs (including TS

of TCH) of different sites cannot be allocated to the same TS. In case of cabinet

group combination, though multiple combined cabinet groups belong to the same

site (only one OML required), the RSL TSs and TCH TSs of different cabinetgroups cannot be multiplexed, i.e., the RSL TSs and TCH TSs of different

cabinet groups are taken on as TSs of different sites.

z  For dual-chain networking, the traffic TS and signaling TS of the same TRX must

be allocated to the same port, and they cannot be allocated to two different ports.

z  The 256 HW timeslots (trunk circuits) of the BS1 interface are numbered

sequentially. The TCH timeslots are allocated sequentially from 0 to 255, while

the OML and RSL timeslots are allocated sequentially from 255 to 0

z  To support dynamic adjustment to channel rate, two HW timeslots are allocated

to each TCH in the Radio Channel Configuration Table. When the TCH type is

configured as full rate, the full-rate TCH occupies one timeslot, and the other one

is idle in normal cases. When the channel rate is adjusted, i.e. one full-rate TCH

is adjusted into two half-rate TCHs, each of the half-rate TCHs occupies a

timeslot. When the TCH type is set as half rate, there are actually two half-rate

TCHs, and each occupies a HW timeslot.

V. Examples

Ports 0 and 1 of the BIE are linked into a full-rate ring networking mode, in which five

sites (Site0~Site4) are connected and each site is configured with two TRXs. Channel

0 of TRX0 is "Primary BCCH", and channel 1 is "SDCCH8". The other channels of TRX0 together with all the channels of TRX1 are configured as "Full rate TCH".

"Site3" is a tributary site, and the other four sites are loop sites. Port 0 of the BIE

serves as the normal ring port, and port 1 of the BIE as the reverse ring port. Port2 is

the port of the superior site of "Site3". The networking topology of sites is shown as

follows:

Site 0BSC

BIE Port 0

Site 1 Site 3

Site 4 Site 2

 

Figure B-27 Networking topology of sites in full-rate ring networking mode

Page 274: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 274/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-48

1) HW timeslots

Table B-28 HW timeslots in full-rate ring networking mode

HW0 HW1 HW2 HW3 HW4 HW5 HW6 HW7

0 S0T0C2 32 S2T0C6 64 S4T1C2 96 128 160 192 224

1 S0T0C3 33 S2T0C7 65 S4T1C3 97 129 161 193 225

2 S0T0C4 34 S2T1C0 66 S4T1C4 98 130 162 194 226

3 S0T0C5 35 S2T1C1 67 S4T1C5 99 131 163 195 227

4 S0T0C6 36 S2T1C2 68 S4T1C6 100 132 164 196 228

5 S0T0C7 37 S2T1C3 69 S4T1C7 101 133 165 197 229

6 S0T1C0 38 S2T1C4 70 102 134 166 198 230

7 S0T1C1 39 S2T1C5 71 103 135 167 199 231

8 S0T1C2 40 S2T1C6 72 104 136 168 200 232

9 S0T1C3 41 S2T1C7 73 105 137 169 201 233

10 S0T1C4 42 S3T0C2 74 106 138 170 202 234

11 S0T1C5 43 S3T0C3 75 107 139 171 203 235

12 S0T1C6 44 S3T0C4 76 108 140 172 204 236

13 S0T1C7 45 S3T0C5 77 109 141 173 205 237

14 S1T0C2 46 S3T0C6 78 110 142 174 206 238

15 S1T0C3 47 S3T0C7 79 111 143 175 207 239

16 S1T0C4 48 S3T1C0 80 112 144 176 208 240

17 S1T0C5 49 S3T1C1 81 113 145 177 209 241 S4RSL0/RSL1

18 S1T0C6 50 S3T1C2 82 114 146 178 210 242 S3RSL0/RSL1

19 S1T0C7 51 S3T1C3 83 115 147 179 211 243 S2RSL0/RSL1

20 S1T1C0 52 S3T1C4 84 116 148 180 212 244 S1RSL0/RSL1

Page 275: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 275/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-49

HW0 HW1 HW2 HW3 HW4 HW5 HW6 HW7

21 S1T1C1 53 S3T1C5 85 117 149 181 213 245 S0RSL0/RSL1

22 S1T1C2 54 S3T1C6 86 118 150 182 214 246 OML4(reverse)

23 S1T1C3 55 S3T1C7 87 119 151 183 215 247 OML4(normal)

24 S1T1C4 56 S4T0C2 88 120 152 184 216 248 OML3(reverse)

25 S1T1C5 57 S4T0C3 89 121 153 185 217 249 OML3(normal)

26 S1T1C6 58 S4T0C4 90 122 154 186 218 250 OML2(reverse)

27 S1T1C7 59 S4T0C5 91 123 155 187 219 251 OML2(normal)

28 S2T0C2 60 S4T0C6 92 124 156 188 220 252 OML1(reverse)

29 S2T0C3 61 S4T0C7 93 125 157 189 221 253 OML1(normal)

30 S2T0C4 62 S4T1C0 94 126 158 190 222 254 OML0(reverse)

31 S2T0C5 63 S4T1C1 95 127 159 191 223 255 OML0(normal)

2) Abis timeslots 

Parallel transparent transmission is adopted for the TCH of the normal ring and

reverse ring and RSL signaling channel on the Abis interface. Therefore, the timeslot

sequencing of the TCH and that of the RSL signaling channel in the normal ring and

reverse ring are the same on the Abis interface.

Table B-29 illustrates the distribution of the normal ring timeslots on the Abis

interface.

Table B-29 Distribution of the normal ring timeslots on the Abis interface

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

0 Synchronization TS

1 S0T0C2 S0T0C3 S0T0C4 S0T0C5

2 S0T0C6 S0T0C7 S0T1C0 S0T1C1

3 S0T1C2 S0T1C3 S0T1C4 S0T1C5

4 S0T1C6 S0T1C7

5 S1T0C2 S1T0C3 S1T0C4 S1T0C5

6 S1T0C6 S1T0C7 S1T1C0 S1T1C1

7 S1T1C2 S1T1C3 S1T1C4 S1T1C5

8 S1T1C6 S1T1C7

9 S2T0C2 S2T0C3 S2T0C4 S2T0C5

10 S2T0C6 S2T0C7 S2T1C0 S2T1C1

11 S2T1C2 S2T1C3 S2T1C4 S2T1C5

Page 276: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 276/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-50

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

12 S2T1C6 S2T1C7

13 S3T0C2 S3T0C3 S3T0C4 S3T0C5

14 S3T0C6 S3T0C7 S3T1C0 S3T1C1

15 S3T1C2 S3T1C3 S3T1C4 S3T1C516 S3T1C6 S3T1C7

17 S4T0C2 S4T0C3 S4T0C4 S4T0C5

18 S4T0C6 S4T0C7 S4T1C0 S4T1C1

19 S4T1C2 S4T1C3 S4T1C4 S4T1C5

20 S4T1C6 S4T1C7

22 S4RSL0 S4RSL1

23 S3RSL0 S3RSL1

24 S2RSL0 S2RSL1

25 S1RSL0 S1RSL1

26 S0RSL0 S0RSL1

27 OML4

28 OML329 OML2

30 OML1

31 OML0

Since the timeslot sequencing of the TCH and that of the RSL signaling channel in

the normal ring and reverse ring are the same on the Abis interface. Only the

sequencing of OML timeslots is listed, as shown in Table B-30.

Table B-30 Timeslots distribution on the Abis interface in the reverse ring

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

27 OML3

28 OML0

29 OML1

30 OML2

31 OML4

3) Transparent transmission timeslots of the loop site in the normal ring

Table B-31 Distribution of transparent transmission timeslots on the Abis interface in the normal ring (a)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

0 Synchronization TS Synchronization TS

1 S0T0C2 S0T0C3 S0T0C4 S0T0C5

2 S0T0C6 S0T0C7 S0T1C0 S0T1C1

3 S0T1C2 S0T1C3 S0T1C4 S0T1C5

4 S0T1C6 S0T1C7

5 S1T0C2 S1T0C3 S1T0C4 S1T0C5 S1T0C2 S1T0C3 S1T0C4 S1T0C5

6 S1T0C6 S1T0C7 S1T1C0 S1T1C1 S1T0C6 S1T0C7 S1T1C0 S1T1C1

7 S1T1C2 S1T1C3 S1T1C4 S1T1C5 S1T1C2 S1T1C3 S1T1C4 S1T1C5

8 S1T1C6 S1T1C7 S1T1C6 S1T1C7

9 S2T0C2 S2T0C3 S2T0C4 S2T0C5 S2T0C2 S2T0C3 S2T0C4 S2T0C5

10 S2T0C6 S2T0C7 S2T1C0 S2T1C1 S2T0C6 S2T0C7 S2T1C0 S2T1C1

11 S2T1C2 S2T1C3 S2T1C4 S2T1C5 S2T1C2 S2T1C3 S2T1C4 S2T1C5

12 S2T1C6 S2T1C7 S2T1C6 S2T1C7

Page 277: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 277/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-51

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

13 S3T0C2 S3T0C3 S3T0C4 S3T0C5 S3T0C2 S3T0C3 S3T0C4 S3T0C5

14 S3T0C6 S3T0C7 S3T1C0 S3T1C1 S3T0C6 S3T0C7 S3T1C0 S3T1C1

15 S3T1C2 S3T1C3 S3T1C4 S3T1C5 S3T1C2 S3T1C3 S3T1C4 S3T1C5

16 S3T1C6 S3T1C7 S3T1C6 S3T1C717 S4T0C2 S4T0C3 S4T0C4 S4T0C5 S4T0C2 S4T0C3 S4T0C4 S4T0C5

18 S4T0C6 S4T0C7 S4T1C0 S4T1C1 S4T0C6 S4T0C7 S4T1C0 S4T1C1

19 S4T1C2 S4T1C3 S4T1C4 S4T1C5 S4T1C2 S4T1C3 S4T1C4 S4T1C5

20 S4T1C6 S4T1C7 S4T1C6 S4T1C7

21

22 S4RSL0 S4RSL1 S4RSL0 S4RSL1

23 S3RSL0 S3RSL1 S3RSL0 S3RSL1

24 S2RSL0 S2RSL1 S2RSL0 S2RSL1

25 S1RSL0 S1RSL1 S1RSL0 S1RSL1

26 S0RSL0 S0RSL1

27 OML4 OML4

28 OML3 OML3

29 OML2 OML230 OML1

31 OML0 OML1

BTS0 BTS1

Table B-32 Distribution of transparent transmission timeslots on the Abis interface in the normal ring (b)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

0 Synchronization TS Synchronization TS1

2

3

4

5

6

78

9 S2T0C2 S2T0C3 S2T0C4 S2T0C5

10 S2T0C6 S2T0C7 S2T1C0 S2T1C1

11 S2T1C2 S2T1C3 S2T1C4 S2T1C5

12 S2T1C6 S2T1C7

1314

15

16

17 S4T0C2 S4T0C3 S4T0C4 S4T0C5 S4T0C2 S4T0C3 S4T0C4 S4T0C518 S4T0C6 S4T0C7 S4T1C0 S4T1C1 S4T0C6 S4T0C7 S4T1C0 S4T1C1

19 S4T1C2 S4T1C3 S4T1C4 S4T1C5 S4T1C2 S4T1C3 S4T1C4 S4T1C5

20 S4T1C6 S4T1C7 S4T1C6 S4T1C7

21

22 S4RSL0 S4RSL1 S4RSL0 S4RSL1

23

24 S2RSL0 S2RSL1

25

2627 OML4

28

29

30

31 OML2 OML4

Page 278: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 278/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-52

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

BTS2 BTS3

4) Transparent transmission timeslots of the loop site in the reverse ring

Table B-33 Distribution of transparent transmission timeslots on the Abis interface in the reverse ring (a)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

0 Synchronization TS Synchronization TS

1 S0T0C2 S0T0C3 S0T0C4 S0T0C5 S0T0C2 S0T0C3 S0T0C4 S0T0C5

2 S0T0C6 S0T0C7 S0T1C0 S0T1C1 S0T0C6 S0T0C7 S0T1C0 S0T1C1

3 S0T1C2 S0T1C3 S0T1C4 S0T1C5 S0T1C2 S0T1C3 S0T1C4 S0T1C5

4 S0T1C6 S0T1C7 S0T1C6 S0T1C7

5 S1T0C2 S1T0C3 S1T0C4 S1T0C5 S1T0C2 S1T0C3 S1T0C4 S1T0C5

6 S1T0C6 S1T0C7 S1T1C0 S1T1C1 S1T0C6 S1T0C7 S1T1C0 S1T1C1

7 S1T1C2 S1T1C3 S1T1C4 S1T1C5 S1T1C2 S1T1C3 S1T1C4 S1T1C5

8 S1T1C6 S1T1C7 S1T1C6 S1T1C79 S2T0C2 S2T0C3 S2T0C4 S2T0C5 S2T0C2 S2T0C3 S2T0C4 S2T0C5

10 S2T0C6 S2T0C7 S2T1C0 S2T1C1 S2T0C6 S2T0C7 S2T1C0 S2T1C1

11 S2T1C2 S2T1C3 S2T1C4 S2T1C5 S2T1C2 S2T1C3 S2T1C4 S2T1C5

12 S2T1C6 S2T1C7 S2T1C6 S2T1C7

13 S3T0C2 S3T0C3 S3T0C4 S3T0C5 S3T0C2 S3T0C3 S3T0C4 S3T0C5

14 S3T0C6 S3T0C7 S3T1C0 S3T1C1 S3T0C6 S3T0C7 S3T1C0 S3T1C1

15 S3T1C2 S3T1C3 S3T1C4 S3T1C5 S3T1C2 S3T1C3 S3T1C4 S3T1C516 S3T1C6 S3T1C7 S3T1C6 S3T1C7

17 S4T0C2 S4T0C3 S4T0C4 S4T0C5

18 S4T0C6 S4T0C7 S4T1C0 S4T1C1

19 S4T1C2 S4T1C3 S4T1C4 S4T1C5

20 S4T1C6 S4T1C7

21

22 S4RSL0 S4RSL1

23 S3RSL0 S3RSL1 S3RSL0 S3RSL1

24 S2RSL0 S2RSL1 S2RSL0 S2RSL1

25 S1RSL0 S1RSL1 S1RSL0 S1RSL1

26 S0RSL0 S0RSL1 S0RSL0 S0RSL1

27 OML3 OML3

28 OML0 OML0

29 OML1 OML1

30 OML2

31 OML4 OML2

BTS0 BTS1

Table B-34 Distribution of transparent transmission timeslots on the Abis interface in the reverse ring (b)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

0 Synchronization TS Synchronization TS1 S0T0C2 S0T0C3 S0T0C4 S0T0C5 S0T0C2 S0T0C3 S0T0C4 S0T0C5

2 S0T0C6 S0T0C7 S0T1C0 S0T1C1 S0T0C6 S0T0C7 S0T1C0 S0T1C1

3 S0T1C2 S0T1C3 S0T1C4 S0T1C5 S0T1C2 S0T1C3 S0T1C4 S0T1C5

4 S0T1C6 S0T1C7 S0T1C6 S0T1C7

5 S1T0C2 S1T0C3 S1T0C4 S1T0C5

6 S1T0C6 S1T0C7 S1T1C0 S1T1C17 S1T1C2 S1T1C3 S1T1C4 S1T1C5

8 S1T1C6 S1T1C7

9

Page 279: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 279/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge

B-53

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

10

11

12

13 S3T0C2 S3T0C3 S3T0C4 S3T0C514 S3T0C6 S3T0C7 S3T1C0 S3T1C1

15 S3T1C2 S3T1C3 S3T1C4 S3T1C5

16 S3T1C6 S3T1C7

17

1819

20

21

22

23 S3RSL0 S3RSL1

2425 S1RSL0 S1RSL1

26 S0RSL0 S0RSL1 S0RSL0 S0RSL1

27 OML3

28 OML0

29

30

31 OML1 OML0BTS2 BTS3

Page 280: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 280/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

 Appendix CCorrespondence Relation between Data Table and DBF Files

C-1

Appendix C Correspondence Relation between

Data Table and DBF Files

Configuration

Frame Description Table framedes

Slot Description Table shelfdes

Master Node Description Table nodedesc

HW Description Table hwgrpdes

Module Description Table auxiliar 

Clock Description Table clockdes

Clock Configuration Table clkconfi

GCKS Clock Configuration Table (SM) clkcfg

Software Parameter 

Public Parameter Table pubparam

Module Parameter Table modparam

Common Maximum Tuple Table pmaxtup

Module Maximum Tuple Table mmaxtup

Software Parameter Table softpara

Timer Table timer 

BTS Software Parameter Table btspara

Message Filter Table msgfil

 AM Configuration

 AM Frame Description Table amframe

 AM Board Description Table amboard

 AM Module Description Table ammodule

 AM Alarm Environment Variable Table amenvic

 AM Adjacent Module OPT Table amadj

Signaling Link Table sigroute

E3M CLK Source Output Selection Table e16clk

E3M E1 Configuration Table e16bde1

 AM GCKS Configuration Table amckscfg

 AM Alarm Screening Table amwrnmsk

Local office

Local Office Information Table locexinf 

BSC Cell Table bsccell

Frequency Hopping Table hopdata

TRX Configuration Table bsctrx

Radio Channel Configuration Table Abiscir 

LAPD Semi-perm. Connection Table lapdsemi

Page 281: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 281/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

 Appendix CCorrespondence Relation between Data Table and DBF Files

C-2

Local office

LAPD Signaling Connection Table lapdsglk

BSC BIE Description Table bscbiesd

BSC BIE Active/Stby. Group Description Table biegrpc

Site BIE Trunk Mode Description Table biestdp

Site BIE Configuration Table strelaym

Signaling Channel Link Table sgcanlt

MSM and FTC Mapping Table smiftc

Service Channel Connection Table transglt

GMEM Configuration Table memip

Board Software Loading Table Cardlod

BSC BIE Semi-permanent Connection Table Bscbiesp

SiteSite Description Table siteinfo

Carrier Configuration Table rccfg

Site Frame Description Table shelfinf 

Site Slot Description Table btsslot

Site Software Configuration Table softidx

Environment Alarm Configuration Table btsenvi

 Antenna and Feeder Configuration Table reactive

Cell

System Information Table symgdatl

Cell Configuration Table cellcfg

Cell Allocation Table cealotl

BA1 (BCCH) Table ba1

BA2 (SACCH) Table ba2

Cell Attribute Table cellattr 

Cell Alarm Threshold Table cellalm

Cell Call Control Table callctrl

Cell Call Control Parameter Table celcalmp

Cell Module Information Table cgitbl

Handover 

Handover Control Table swctrl

Cell Description Table celldes

External Cell Description Table extcell

 Adjacent Cell Relation Table nebcell

Filter Table filterd

Penalty Table penalty

Emergency Handover Table urgedat

Load Handover Table clsdata

Page 282: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 282/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

 Appendix CCorrespondence Relation between Data Table and DBF Files

C-3

Handover 

Normal Handover Table nordata

Fast-Moving Handover Table movedata

Intra-cell Continuous HO Control Table intraho

GSM0508 Handover Table cellho2

Concentric Cell Handover Table circswit

Power 

Power Control Selection Table pwrctls

Ordinary Cell Power Control Table cellpwrc

BTS Power Control Table btspwrc

MS Power Control Table mspwrc

HWII Power Control Table hw2pwrct

Channel

Radio Channel Management Control Table freechpr 

HW II Channel Allocation Table chanall

Trunk

Office Direction Table office

Trunk Group Table tkgrp

Trunk SS7 Table no7info

Trunk Circuit Table tkcircui

Signaling Link Table sigroute

Pb Interface Trunk Circuit Table pbinterf 

Signaling

CIC Module Table cicmdl

MTP DEP Table mtpdsp

MTP Route Table mtproute

MTP Linkset Table mtplinks

MTP Link Table mtplinkSCCP DSP Table sccpdpc

SCCP SSN Table sccpssn

PCIC Module Table pcicmodu

 Alarm

BSC Alarm Parameter 

BTS Alarm Information Configuration Table warncfg

BTS Alarm Environment Variable Table envicfg

BTS Alarm Parameter 

 Alarm Information Parameter Table warncfgb

Page 283: Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 283/283

Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual

 Appendix CCorrespondence Relation between Data Table and DBF Files

 Alarm